FDMSRcRetail Class
Properties Methods Events Config Settings Errors
The FDMSRcRetail class is an advanced tool used to authorize credit cards in a Retail environment, where the customer is purchasing products or services in person. This class makes authorizing these types of transactions very easy. Supported Industry Types include retail stores and restaurants.
Syntax
FDMSRcRetail
Remarks
This class connects to the First Data Merchant Services (FDMS) processor, by way of the Datawire VXN transaction transport network. Transactions originating with these classs go through Datawire, to the FDMS processor where the transaction is authorized. The result is then returned back through Datawire and received by the class. This class can be integrated into web pages or stand-alone Point Of Sale applications. Because all SSL communications are handled inside the class, any application or web page can be deployed without the need for expensive dedicated SSL servers.
The FDMSRcRetail class makes authorizing Card-Present transactions (where the customer's card is swiped through a card reader) very easy by adding an additional layer of abstraction between the programmer and the protocol. There is no need to deal with raw sockets, TLS/SSL handshakes, or data packet formatting. The steps to setting up the class and authorizing a transaction are outlined below:
Datawire Setup
First, you must register and activate your account with Datawire. FDMS Rapid Connect will provide you with the following values:
The FDMSRegister class must be used to activate the merchant and receive a DatawireId. Once you acquire the DatawireId and receive your transaction URLs through ServiceDiscovery, you may begin to authorize transactions. For instance:
FDMSRegister.FDMSPlatform = FdmsregisterFDMSPlatforms.fpRapidConnect;
FDMSRegister.MerchantNumber = "000000999990";
FDMSRegister.MerchantTerminalNumber = "555555";
FDMSRegister.Config("GroupId=20001"); //Required for Rapid Connect
FDMSRegister.TransactionNumber = "1"; //any unique number will do.
FDMSRegister.URL = "https://stagingsupport.datawire.net/staging_expresso/SRS.do";
FDMSRegister.Register();
FDMSRegister.TransactionNumber = FDMSRegister.TransactionNumber + 1;
FDMSRegister.Activate();
FDMSRegister.ServiceDiscovery(FDMSRegister.PrimaryDiscoveryURL);
for (int i = 0; i < FDMSRegister.ServiceProviders.Length; i++) {
FDMSRegister.Ping(FDMSRegister.ServiceProviders[i]);
Console.WriteLine(FDMSRegister.ServiceProviders[i] + " = " + FDMSRegister.PingResponseTime);
}
To authorize a credit, debit, ebt or FSA/HSA card set the MerchantId, MerchantTerminalNumber, and GroupId properties with the values supplied by FDMS Rapid Connect. Set the DatawireId property with the value retrieved by the FDMSRegister class after activating your merchant account. Set the URL property with one of the URLs you retrieved during ServiceDiscovery.
Transaction Processing
To begin processing transactions first set the required merchant values. For instance:
retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail;
retail.TPPID = "AAA000";
retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
retail.MerchantId = "1234";
retail.GroupId = "20001";
retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
Next specify transaction specific information. These values uniquely identify the transaction to Datawire and FDMS.
retail.STAN = "112";
retail.TransactionNumber = "1234";
retail.OrderNumber = "123";
retail.ReferenceNumber = "123";
Then specify customer card and address information along with the transaction amount:
retail.Card.MagneticStripe = "B4012000033330026^FDCS TEST CARD /VISA^170410054321000000000000000 150 A";
retail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack1;
retail.TransactionAmount = "1200"; //$12.00
Finally, submit the transaction by calling the Sale method.
retail.Sale();
The Code field indicates the result of the transaction. A code of 000 indicates success. For all other values please see the Response Codes section. Additional Response properties such as ApprovalCode, AuthorizedAmount, Text, AVSResult, CVVResult, and more, provide further details about the transaction response.
To perform subsequent operations on a transaction, such as calling Reverse to reverse a Sale, or calling Capture to capture a previous AuthOnly transaction the GetDetailAggregate method must be used to get details about the original transaction. This aggregate must be stored securely, it will contain cardholder information that is required for subsequent transactions. For instance:
retail.AuthOnly();
//Save the detail aggregate to use with Capture
string aggregate = retail.GetDetailAggregate();
//The aggregate must then be stored securely.
//At a later time the aggregate is retrieved in order to perform a capture.
//Capture
retail = new Fdmsrcretail();
...
//Specify the detail aggregate from the original transaction
retail.SetDetailAggregate(aggregate);
retail.Capture();
Transaction Types
In addition to a basic sale transaction, additional transaction types exist for other common operations. Not all transaction types are applicable for all classs. Check the method list for applicable transaction types.
AuthOnly | An authorization that must be Captured later. |
BalanceInquiry | Inquire about available balance. |
Capture | Captures a previous AuthOnly transaction for settlement. |
Credit | Credits funds to the cardholder. This is not based on a previous transaction. |
Reverse | Reverse a previous transaction. This is also used for timeout reversals. |
Sale | A basic sale, no other steps are required to complete the payment. |
VerifyCard | Verifies that a card is valid. |
HostTotals | Requests a Host Totals Report for a particular day. |
VoucherClear | Performs an online force-post entry of a voice-authorized Food Benefit or eWIC transaction. |
Note: FDMS Rapid Connect is a host capture system. No explicit calls are needed to settle or otherwise manage the batch.
Gratuity for Restaurant Transactions:
In order to add gratuity the transaction may be authorized using AuthOnly and then Captured for a different amount that includes the tip. Gratuity cannot be added later to a Sale transaction. Consult FDMS for any applicable limits on the additional amount being captured.
Level 2 Transactions
The values required for Level 2 transaction depend on the card type. The following tables indicate which properties are valid for what card type:
American Express
- CustomerReferenceNumber (required if TaxAmount specified)
- DestinationPostalCode (required)
- DiscountAmount (required if discount applied)
- DutyAmount (required if duty amount applied)
- FreightAmount (required if freight amount applied)
- ProductDescription (required)
- PurchaseIdentifier (required)
- MerchantTaxId
- ShipFromPostalCode
- TaxAmount
- TaxIndicator
- CustomerReferenceNumber (required if TaxAmount specified)
- DiscountAmount (required if discount applied)
- DutyAmount (required if duty amount applied)
- FreightAmount (required if freight amount applied)
- PurchaseIdentifier (required)
- TaxAmount (required if TaxIndicator indicates tax is applied)
- TaxIndicator (required)
- DestinationPostalCode
- ShipFromPostalCode
- MerchantTaxId
- CustomerReferenceNumber (required if TaxAmount specified)
- DiscountAmount (required if discount applied)
- DutyAmount (required if duty amount applied)
- FreightAmount (required if freight amount applied)
- MerchantTaxId (required)
- PurchaseIdentifier (required)
- TaxAmount (required if TaxIndicator indicates tax is applied)
- TaxIndicator (required)
- DestinationPostalCode
- ShipFromPostalCode
Property List
The following is the full list of the properties of the class with short descriptions. Click on the links for further details.
ApplicationId | Identifies the merchant application to the Datawire System. |
BillPay | Specifies information used in a bill payment or MIT transaction. |
Card | Contains the customer's credit card information. |
CashBack | Optional cash back amount to return to the customer. |
CustomerAddress | The customer's billing address. |
CustomerZip | Customer's zip code (or postal code if outside of the USA). |
DatawireId | Identifies the merchant to the Datawire System. |
DigitalWalletType | Identifies the brand of digital wallet or tokenization program used in a transaction. |
EMVData | The EMV Data returned from a Pin Pad after reading an EMV card. |
GroupId | The Id assigned by FDMS to identify the merchant or group of merchants. |
IndustryType | The merchant's industry type. |
Level2 | Specifies Level 2 (purchasing card information). |
MerchantId | A unique Id used to identify the merchant within the FDMS and Datawire systems. |
MerchantServicePhone | The merchant's phone number, used to assist cardholders. |
MerchantTerminalNumber | Used to identify a unique terminal within a merchant location. |
MerchantURL | The URL of the site performing the ECommerce transaction. |
OrderNumber | A merchant assigned order number to uniquely reference the transaction. |
Proxy | A set of properties related to proxy access. |
ReferenceNumber | A value assigned by the merchant to uniquely reference a transaction and any subsequent related transactions. |
Response | Contains the response to an authorization request. |
ReversalTransactionType | The type of transaction to reverse. |
ReversalType | The type of reversal. |
SettlementMode | Indicates whether the class uses Host Capture (0) or Terminal Capture (1) system. |
SSLAcceptServerCert | Instructs the class to unconditionally accept the server certificate that matches the supplied certificate. |
SSLCert | The certificate to be used during Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) negotiation. |
SSLProvider | The Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security (SSL/TLS) implementation to use. |
SSLServerCert | The server certificate for the last established connection. |
STAN | The merchant assigned System Trace Audit Number(STAN). |
Timeout | A timeout for the class. |
TPPID | Third Party Processor Identifier assigned by FDMS. |
TransactionAmount | The transaction amount to be authorized. |
TransactionNumber | Uniquely identifies the transaction. |
URL | Location of the Datawire server to which transactions are sent. |
VisaIdentifier | Additional merchant identification field used when authorizing Visa transactions. |
Method List
The following is the full list of the methods of the class with short descriptions. Click on the links for further details.
AuthOnly | Performs an authorization request. |
BalanceInquiry | Performs a Balance Inquiry Request using the specified Card data. |
Capture | Captures a previously authorized transaction. |
Config | Sets or retrieves a configuration setting. |
Credit | Submits a credit transaction. |
GetDetailAggregate | Returns a detail aggregate containing details of this transaction, which is used for Capture or Reverse transactions or settlement when using Terminal Capture mode. |
HostTotals | Performs a Host Totals request. |
Interrupt | Interrupts the current action. |
Reset | Clears all properties to their default values. |
Reverse | Reverses a transaction. |
Sale | Performs a sale transaction. |
SetDetailAggregate | Specifies the detail aggregate before calling Capture or Reverse. |
VerifyCard | Performs a zero dollar verification of the card. |
Event List
The following is the full list of the events fired by the class with short descriptions. Click on the links for further details.
Connected | Fired immediately after a connection completes (or fails). |
DataPacketIn | Fired when receiving a data packet from the transaction server. |
DataPacketOut | Fired when sending a data packet to the transaction server. |
Disconnected | Fired when a connection is closed. |
Error | Fired when information is available about errors during data delivery. |
SSLServerAuthentication | Fired after the server presents its certificate to the client. |
SSLStatus | Fired when secure connection progress messages are available. |
Status | Shows the progress of the FDMS/Datawire connection. |
Config Settings
The following is a list of config settings for the class with short descriptions. Click on the links for further details.
ACI | Authorization Characteristics Indicator. |
AllowPartialAuths | Indicates whether partial authorizations are supported. |
AltMerchantAddress | The alternative merchant address. |
AltMerchantCity | The alternative merchant city. |
AltMerchantCountryCode | The alternative merchant country code. |
AltMerchantEmail | The alternative merchant email. |
AltMerchantName | The alternative merchant name. |
AltMerchantState | The alternative merchant state. |
AltMerchantZip | The alternative merchant zip code. |
AuthIndicator | Indicate the type of authorization requested. |
AuthorizationIndicator | Indicates whether the authorization is a final authorization. |
AuthSource | Indicates the source of the decision for the Visa transaction. |
CardInputMode | The method used to input the card details. |
CardType | Specifies the type of card. |
CITMITFrameIndicator | CIT/MIT Frame Indicator (Mastercard only). |
ClientTimeout | Indicates timeout client application will wait for response. |
CurrencyCode | Currency Code for this transaction. |
DebugTrace | Whether to enable debug logging. |
DeviceTypeIndicator | Defines the form factor used at the POS for MasterCard PayPass transactions. |
Duration | Length of hotel stay in days. |
ECI | Identifies the security level of the ECommerce transaction. |
EMVOnlineKSN | Clear-text Key Sequence Number for EMV Online PIN transactions. |
EMVOnlinePIN | DUKPT DES encrypted PIN block for EMV Online PIN transactions. |
ExtraCharges | List of extra charges for hotel transactions. |
FolioNumber | The Folio or Room Agreement number assigned by the hotel. |
GetTransArmorToken | Allows you to retrieve a TransArmor Token for a specified card. |
HostTotalsPassword | The merchant password required in Host Totals requests. |
HostTotalsType | Indicates the Host Totals Report type requested. |
IsCOFScheduled | Indicates whether the stored credential transaction was scheduled. |
IsDeferredAuth | Indicates whether the transaction is a Deferred Authorization. |
IsOnlineRefund | Indicates whether a transaction is Online Refund Authorization. |
LocalTransactionDate | The local date of the transaction. |
LodgingReferenceNumber | A reference number assigned by the hotel/lodging establishment. |
MerchantCategoryCode | The 4 digit Merchant Category Code (MCC). |
MITTransactionId | Transaction Id associated with the original authorization of a Credential on File Transaction. |
MOTOIndicator | Indicates whether the transaction is Mail Order or Telephone Order. |
POSConditionCode | The POS condition code. |
POSId | Identifies the specific point of sale device. |
ProgramIndicator | Indicates the reason for the charge in a hotel transaction. |
RoomNumber | The Room Number assigned by the hotel. |
RoomRate | The daily room rate in a hotel transaction. |
StoredCredentialIndicator | Indicates the usage of stored credentials. |
SupportPINLessDebit | Indicates whether the terminal can support swiped PINLess Debit transactions. |
SurchargeAmount | Indicates Merchant Surcharge/Transaction Fee Amount charged to the customer to account for acquirer-assessed surcharge. |
TerminalCardCapability | The terminal's card capture capability. |
TerminalEntryCapability | The terminal's entry mode capability. |
TerminalLocationIndicator | The terminal's location. |
TerminalPinCapability | The terminal's PIN capability. |
TerminalTaxCapability | The terminal's ability to prompt for tax. |
TotalAuthorizedAmount | Total Authorized Amount. |
TransactionInitiation | Indicates how the transaction was initiated. |
TransArmorKey | Specifies the TransArmor key used to perform the encryption. |
TransArmorKeyId | Specifies the Id of the TransArmor key used to perform the encryption. |
TransArmorMode | Specifies the TransArmor Security Level to use. |
TransArmorProviderId | The Id of the Provider that issued a TransArmorToken. |
TransArmorToken | A TransArmor Token used in place of a card number or magnetic stripe data. |
TransArmorTokenType | The FDMS assigned token type. |
TransArmorTokenType | Specifies the type of TransArmor token that will be used. |
TransArmorUpdateIndicator | Indicates whether your TransArmorKey needs to be updated. |
UpdateTransArmorKey | Allows you to update your TransArmor Key. |
UTCTransactionDate | The UTC date of the transaction. |
VisaCheckoutIndicator | Indicates whether the transaction is a Visa Checkout transaction. |
VoiceApprovalCode | The voice approval. |
AcceptEncoding | Used to tell the server which types of content encodings the client supports. |
AllowHTTPCompression | This property enables HTTP compression for receiving data. |
AllowHTTPFallback | Whether HTTP/2 connections are permitted to fallback to HTTP/1.1. |
Append | Whether to append data to LocalFile. |
Authorization | The Authorization string to be sent to the server. |
BytesTransferred | Contains the number of bytes transferred in the response data. |
ChunkSize | Specifies the chunk size in bytes when using chunked encoding. |
CompressHTTPRequest | Set to true to compress the body of a PUT or POST request. |
EncodeURL | If set to True the URL will be encoded by the class. |
FollowRedirects | Determines what happens when the server issues a redirect. |
GetOn302Redirect | If set to True the class will perform a GET on the new location. |
HTTP2HeadersWithoutIndexing | HTTP2 headers that should not update the dynamic header table with incremental indexing. |
HTTPVersion | The version of HTTP used by the class. |
IfModifiedSince | A date determining the maximum age of the desired document. |
KeepAlive | Determines whether the HTTP connection is closed after completion of the request. |
KerberosSPN | The Service Principal Name for the Kerberos Domain Controller. |
LogLevel | The level of detail that is logged. |
MaxRedirectAttempts | Limits the number of redirects that are followed in a request. |
NegotiatedHTTPVersion | The negotiated HTTP version. |
OtherHeaders | Other headers as determined by the user (optional). |
ProxyAuthorization | The authorization string to be sent to the proxy server. |
ProxyAuthScheme | The authorization scheme to be used for the proxy. |
ProxyPassword | A password if authentication is to be used for the proxy. |
ProxyPort | Port for the proxy server (default 80). |
ProxyServer | Name or IP address of a proxy server (optional). |
ProxyUser | A user name if authentication is to be used for the proxy. |
SentHeaders | The full set of headers as sent by the client. |
StatusCode | The status code of the last response from the server. |
StatusLine | The first line of the last response from the server. |
TransferredData | The contents of the last response from the server. |
TransferredDataLimit | The maximum number of incoming bytes to be stored by the class. |
TransferredHeaders | The full set of headers as received from the server. |
TransferredRequest | The full request as sent by the client. |
UseChunkedEncoding | Enables or Disables HTTP chunked encoding for transfers. |
UseIDNs | Whether to encode hostnames to internationalized domain names. |
UsePlatformHTTPClient | Whether or not to use the platform HTTP client. |
UseProxyAutoConfigURL | Whether to use a Proxy auto-config file when attempting a connection. |
UserAgent | Information about the user agent (browser). |
ConnectionTimeout | Sets a separate timeout value for establishing a connection. |
ConnectionTimeout | Sets a separate timeout value for establishing a connection. |
FirewallAutoDetect | Tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use firewall system settings, if available. |
FirewallAutoDetect | Tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use firewall system settings, if available. |
FirewallHost | Name or IP address of firewall (optional). |
FirewallHost | Name or IP address of firewall (optional). |
FirewallPassword | Password to be used if authentication is to be used when connecting through the firewall. |
FirewallPassword | Password to be used if authentication is to be used when connecting through the firewall. |
FirewallPort | The TCP port for the FirewallHost;. |
FirewallPort | The TCP port for the FirewallHost;. |
FirewallType | Determines the type of firewall to connect through. |
FirewallType | Determines the type of firewall to connect through. |
FirewallUser | A user name if authentication is to be used connecting through a firewall. |
FirewallUser | A user name if authentication is to be used connecting through a firewall. |
KeepAliveInterval | The retry interval, in milliseconds, to be used when a TCP keep-alive packet is sent and no response is received. |
KeepAliveInterval | The retry interval, in milliseconds, to be used when a TCP keep-alive packet is sent and no response is received. |
KeepAliveRetryCount | The number of keep-alive packets to be sent before the remotehost is considered disconnected. |
KeepAliveRetryCount | The number of keep-alive packets to be sent before the remotehost is considered disconnected. |
KeepAliveTime | The inactivity time in milliseconds before a TCP keep-alive packet is sent. |
KeepAliveTime | The inactivity time in milliseconds before a TCP keep-alive packet is sent. |
Linger | When set to True, connections are terminated gracefully. |
Linger | When set to True, connections are terminated gracefully. |
LingerTime | Time in seconds to have the connection linger. |
LingerTime | Time in seconds to have the connection linger. |
LocalHost | The name of the local host through which connections are initiated or accepted. |
LocalHost | The name of the local host through which connections are initiated or accepted. |
LocalPort | The port in the local host where the class binds. |
LocalPort | The port in the local host where the class binds. |
MaxLineLength | The maximum amount of data to accumulate when no EOL is found. |
MaxLineLength | The maximum amount of data to accumulate when no EOL is found. |
MaxTransferRate | The transfer rate limit in bytes per second. |
MaxTransferRate | The transfer rate limit in bytes per second. |
ProxyExceptionsList | A semicolon separated list of hosts and IPs to bypass when using a proxy. |
ProxyExceptionsList | A semicolon separated list of hosts and IPs to bypass when using a proxy. |
TCPKeepAlive | Determines whether or not the keep alive socket option is enabled. |
TCPKeepAlive | Determines whether or not the keep alive socket option is enabled. |
TcpNoDelay | Whether or not to delay when sending packets. |
TcpNoDelay | Whether or not to delay when sending packets. |
UseIPv6 | Whether to use IPv6. |
UseIPv6 | Whether to use IPv6. |
LogSSLPackets | Controls whether SSL packets are logged when using the internal security API. |
LogSSLPackets | Controls whether SSL packets are logged when using the internal security API. |
OpenSSLCADir | The path to a directory containing CA certificates. |
OpenSSLCADir | The path to a directory containing CA certificates. |
OpenSSLCAFile | Name of the file containing the list of CA's trusted by your application. |
OpenSSLCAFile | Name of the file containing the list of CA's trusted by your application. |
OpenSSLCipherList | A string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL. |
OpenSSLCipherList | A string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL. |
OpenSSLPrngSeedData | The data to seed the pseudo random number generator (PRNG). |
OpenSSLPrngSeedData | The data to seed the pseudo random number generator (PRNG). |
ReuseSSLSession | Determines if the SSL session is reused. |
ReuseSSLSession | Determines if the SSL session is reused. |
SSLCACertFilePaths | The paths to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux. |
SSLCACertFilePaths | The paths to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux. |
SSLCACerts | A newline separated list of CA certificates to be included when performing an SSL handshake. |
SSLCACerts | A newline separated list of CA certificates to be included when performing an SSL handshake. |
SSLCipherStrength | The minimum cipher strength used for bulk encryption. |
SSLCipherStrength | The minimum cipher strength used for bulk encryption. |
SSLClientCACerts | A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL client certificate validation. |
SSLClientCACerts | A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL client certificate validation. |
SSLEnabledCipherSuites | The cipher suite to be used in an SSL negotiation. |
SSLEnabledCipherSuites | The cipher suite to be used in an SSL negotiation. |
SSLEnabledProtocols | Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols. |
SSLEnabledProtocols | Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols. |
SSLEnableRenegotiation | Whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension is supported. |
SSLEnableRenegotiation | Whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension is supported. |
SSLIncludeCertChain | Whether the entire certificate chain is included in the SSLServerAuthentication event. |
SSLIncludeCertChain | Whether the entire certificate chain is included in the SSLServerAuthentication event. |
SSLKeyLogFile | The location of a file where per-session secrets are written for debugging purposes. |
SSLKeyLogFile | The location of a file where per-session secrets are written for debugging purposes. |
SSLNegotiatedCipher | Returns the negotiated cipher suite. |
SSLNegotiatedCipher | Returns the negotiated cipher suite. |
SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength | Returns the negotiated cipher suite strength. |
SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength | Returns the negotiated cipher suite strength. |
SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite | Returns the negotiated cipher suite. |
SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite | Returns the negotiated cipher suite. |
SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange | Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm. |
SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange | Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm. |
SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength | Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm strength. |
SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength | Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm strength. |
SSLNegotiatedVersion | Returns the negotiated protocol version. |
SSLNegotiatedVersion | Returns the negotiated protocol version. |
SSLSecurityFlags | Flags that control certificate verification. |
SSLSecurityFlags | Flags that control certificate verification. |
SSLServerCACerts | A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL server certificate validation. |
SSLServerCACerts | A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL server certificate validation. |
TLS12SignatureAlgorithms | Defines the allowed TLS 1.2 signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal. |
TLS12SignatureAlgorithms | Defines the allowed TLS 1.2 signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal. |
TLS12SupportedGroups | The supported groups for ECC. |
TLS12SupportedGroups | The supported groups for ECC. |
TLS13KeyShareGroups | The groups for which to pregenerate key shares. |
TLS13KeyShareGroups | The groups for which to pregenerate key shares. |
TLS13SignatureAlgorithms | The allowed certificate signature algorithms. |
TLS13SignatureAlgorithms | The allowed certificate signature algorithms. |
TLS13SupportedGroups | The supported groups for (EC)DHE key exchange. |
TLS13SupportedGroups | The supported groups for (EC)DHE key exchange. |
AbsoluteTimeout | Determines whether timeouts are inactivity timeouts or absolute timeouts. |
AbsoluteTimeout | Determines whether timeouts are inactivity timeouts or absolute timeouts. |
FirewallData | Used to send extra data to the firewall. |
FirewallData | Used to send extra data to the firewall. |
InBufferSize | The size in bytes of the incoming queue of the socket. |
InBufferSize | The size in bytes of the incoming queue of the socket. |
OutBufferSize | The size in bytes of the outgoing queue of the socket. |
OutBufferSize | The size in bytes of the outgoing queue of the socket. |
BuildInfo | Information about the product's build. |
CodePage | The system code page used for Unicode to Multibyte translations. |
LicenseInfo | Information about the current license. |
MaskSensitiveData | Whether sensitive data is masked in log messages. |
ProcessIdleEvents | Whether the class uses its internal event loop to process events when the main thread is idle. |
SelectWaitMillis | The length of time in milliseconds the class will wait when DoEvents is called if there are no events to process. |
UseInternalSecurityAPI | Whether or not to use the system security libraries or an internal implementation. |
ApplicationId Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Identifies the merchant application to the Datawire System.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetApplicationId();
int SetApplicationId(const char* lpszApplicationId); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetApplicationId();
INT SetApplicationId(LPCWSTR lpszApplicationId);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getapplicationid(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setapplicationid(void* lpObj, const char* lpszApplicationId);
QString GetApplicationId();
int SetApplicationId(QString qsApplicationId);
Default Value
"NSOFTDIRECTPXML"
Remarks
The Application Id identifies the application that has generated and is sending the transaction. This is a 15 character alphanumeric code that identifies each application and is provided by the Datawire Secure Transport Vendor Integration Team
This property may be validated along with the DatawireId as connection credentials.
The default value of this property is a value used for testing with Rapid Connect. You may be required to have a new ApplicationId assigned for the software you create with this class.
Data Type
String
BillPay Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Specifies information used in a bill payment or MIT transaction.
Syntax
DPaymentsSDKFDMSRcBillPay* GetBillPay(); int SetBillPay(DPaymentsSDKFDMSRcBillPay* val);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getinstallmentdescription(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setinstallmentdescription(void* lpObj, const char* lpszInstallmentDescription);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getinstallmentinvoicenumber(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setinstallmentinvoicenumber(void* lpObj, const char* lpszInstallmentInvoiceNumber);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getinstallmenttype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setinstallmenttype(void* lpObj, int iInstallmentType);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmerchantadvicecode(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitamount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitamount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMITAmount);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitamounttype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitamounttype(void* lpObj, int iMITAmountType);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitfrequency(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitfrequency(void* lpObj, int iMITFrequency);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitpaymentcurrency(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitpaymentcurrency(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMITPaymentCurrency);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitrecurringpaymenttype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitrecurringpaymenttype(void* lpObj, int iMITRecurringPaymentType);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitregistrationrefnum(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitregistrationrefnum(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMITRegistrationRefNum);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitsequenceindicator(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitsequenceindicator(void* lpObj, int iMITSequenceIndicator);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmittotalpaymentamount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmittotalpaymentamount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMITTotalPaymentAmount);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmittotalpaymentcount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmittotalpaymentcount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMITTotalPaymentCount);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmituniqueid(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmituniqueid(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMITUniqueID);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitvalidationflag(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitvalidationflag(void* lpObj, int iMITValidationFlag);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitvalidationref(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitvalidationref(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMITValidationRef);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_gettransactionindicator(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_settransactionindicator(void* lpObj, int iTransactionIndicator);
QString GetInstallmentDescription();
int SetInstallmentDescription(QString qsInstallmentDescription); QString GetInstallmentInvoiceNumber();
int SetInstallmentInvoiceNumber(QString qsInstallmentInvoiceNumber); int GetInstallmentType();
int SetInstallmentType(int iInstallmentType); QString GetMerchantAdviceCode(); QString GetMITAmount();
int SetMITAmount(QString qsMITAmount); int GetMITAmountType();
int SetMITAmountType(int iMITAmountType); int GetMITFrequency();
int SetMITFrequency(int iMITFrequency); QString GetMITPaymentCurrency();
int SetMITPaymentCurrency(QString qsMITPaymentCurrency); int GetMITRecurringPaymentType();
int SetMITRecurringPaymentType(int iMITRecurringPaymentType); QString GetMITRegistrationRefNum();
int SetMITRegistrationRefNum(QString qsMITRegistrationRefNum); int GetMITSequenceIndicator();
int SetMITSequenceIndicator(int iMITSequenceIndicator); QString GetMITTotalPaymentAmount();
int SetMITTotalPaymentAmount(QString qsMITTotalPaymentAmount); QString GetMITTotalPaymentCount();
int SetMITTotalPaymentCount(QString qsMITTotalPaymentCount); QString GetMITUniqueID();
int SetMITUniqueID(QString qsMITUniqueID); int GetMITValidationFlag();
int SetMITValidationFlag(int iMITValidationFlag); QString GetMITValidationRef();
int SetMITValidationRef(QString qsMITValidationRef); int GetTransactionIndicator();
int SetTransactionIndicator(int iTransactionIndicator);
Remarks
This property specifies information used in processing a bill payment or MIT transaction.
Data Type
Card Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Contains the customer's credit card information.
Syntax
DPaymentsSDKCCCard* GetCard(); int SetCard(DPaymentsSDKCCCard* val);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardtype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardtype(void* lpObj, int iCardType);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardcvvdata(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardcvvdata(void* lpObj, const char* lpszCardCVVData);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardcvvpresence(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardcvvpresence(void* lpObj, int iCardCVVPresence);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardentrydatasource(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardentrydatasource(void* lpObj, int iCardEntryDataSource);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardexpmonth(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardexpmonth(void* lpObj, int iCardExpMonth);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardexpyear(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardexpyear(void* lpObj, int iCardExpYear);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardisencrypted(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardisencrypted(void* lpObj, int bCardIsEncrypted);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardmagneticstripe(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardmagneticstripe(void* lpObj, const char* lpszCardMagneticStripe);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardnumber(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardnumber(void* lpObj, const char* lpszCardNumber);
int GetCardType();
int SetCardType(int iCardType); QString GetCardCVVData();
int SetCardCVVData(QString qsCardCVVData); int GetCardCVVPresence();
int SetCardCVVPresence(int iCardCVVPresence); int GetCardEntryDataSource();
int SetCardEntryDataSource(int iCardEntryDataSource); int GetCardExpMonth();
int SetCardExpMonth(int iCardExpMonth); int GetCardExpYear();
int SetCardExpYear(int iCardExpYear); bool GetCardIsEncrypted();
int SetCardIsEncrypted(bool bCardIsEncrypted); QString GetCardMagneticStripe();
int SetCardMagneticStripe(QString qsCardMagneticStripe); QString GetCardNumber();
int SetCardNumber(QString qsCardNumber);
Remarks
This must be set to an instance of the CCCard type, which will contain information about the credit card to be charged. This may include a MagneticStripe for swiped cards, or a Number, ExpMonth, and ExpYear for manually entered cards. (EntryDataSource indicates which set of properties will be used). See the CCCard type for more information.
This property is not available at design time.
Data Type
CashBack Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Optional cash back amount to return to the customer.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetCashBack();
int SetCashBack(const char* lpszCashBack); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetCashBack();
INT SetCashBack(LPCWSTR lpszCashBack);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcashback(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcashback(void* lpObj, const char* lpszCashBack);
QString GetCashBack();
int SetCashBack(QString qsCashBack);
Default Value
""
Remarks
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The largest possible CashBack amount is "99999", yielding a maximum US dollar amount of $999.99. This field may not contain a negative number.
For cash back transactions, the TransactionAmount must contain the sum total of the purchase amount PLUS the CashBack amount. If the purchase is for $10 and the customer requests $20 cash back, CashBack should be set to "2000" and TransactionAmount must contain "3000".
Note that only US currency is supported for debit transactions.
Data Type
String
CustomerAddress Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
The customer's billing address.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetCustomerAddress();
int SetCustomerAddress(const char* lpszCustomerAddress); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetCustomerAddress();
INT SetCustomerAddress(LPCWSTR lpszCustomerAddress);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcustomeraddress(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcustomeraddress(void* lpObj, const char* lpszCustomerAddress);
QString GetCustomerAddress();
int SetCustomerAddress(QString qsCustomerAddress);
Default Value
""
Remarks
This field is used as part of the Address Verification Service (AVS) and contains the customer's street address as it appears on their monthly statement. Only the street number, street name, and apartment number are required in this field. City and state are not included, and the zip code is set in the CustomerZip property.
The maximum length of this property is 30 characters.
If the customer's address is much greater than the length of this field, it is admissible to include only the street number in this field.
Data Type
String
CustomerZip Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Customer's zip code (or postal code if outside of the USA).
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetCustomerZip();
int SetCustomerZip(const char* lpszCustomerZip); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetCustomerZip();
INT SetCustomerZip(LPCWSTR lpszCustomerZip);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcustomerzip(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcustomerzip(void* lpObj, const char* lpszCustomerZip);
QString GetCustomerZip();
int SetCustomerZip(QString qsCustomerZip);
Default Value
""
Remarks
This field is used as part of the Address Verification Service (AVS). If the customer resides within the United States, this field should contain the five or nine digit zip code as it appears on the customer's monthly statement. If the customer's billing address is outside of the United States, this field should contain the customer's postal code.
The maximum length of this property is 9 characters.
Data Type
String
DatawireId Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Identifies the merchant to the Datawire System.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetDatawireId();
int SetDatawireId(const char* lpszDatawireId); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetDatawireId();
INT SetDatawireId(LPCWSTR lpszDatawireId);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getdatawireid(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setdatawireid(void* lpObj, const char* lpszDatawireId);
QString GetDatawireId();
int SetDatawireId(QString qsDatawireId);
Default Value
""
Remarks
The Datawire Id is a unique customer identifier generated by Datawire and returned to the client after successfully registering the merchant (using the FDMSRegister class). This Id (which is sent in all subsequent transactions) allows a transaction, to pass through the Datawire system and be correctly routed to the FDMS Payment processor.
The maximum length for this property is 32 characters.
Data Type
String
DigitalWalletType Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Identifies the brand of digital wallet or tokenization program used in a transaction.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int GetDigitalWalletType();
int SetDigitalWalletType(int iDigitalWalletType); Unicode (Windows) INT GetDigitalWalletType();
INT SetDigitalWalletType(INT iDigitalWalletType);
Possible Values
FRDW_NOT_USED(0),
FRDW_ANDROID_PAY(1),
FRDW_APPLE_PAY(2),
FRDW_MERCHANT_TOKENIZATION(3),
FRDW_SAMSUNG_PAY(4),
FRDW_DISCOVER_CLICK_TO_PAY(5)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getdigitalwallettype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setdigitalwallettype(void* lpObj, int iDigitalWalletType);
int GetDigitalWalletType();
int SetDigitalWalletType(int iDigitalWalletType);
Default Value
0
Remarks
Digital Wallet Program Type. Possible values are:
0 (frdwNotUsed - default) | Not Used |
1 (frdwAndroidPay) | Android Pay (rebranded to Google Pay) |
2 (frdwApplePay) | Apple Pay |
3 (frdwMerchantTokenization) | MasterCard Merchant Tokenization program |
4 (frdwSamsungPay) | Samsung Pay |
5 (frdwDiscoverClickToPay) | Discover Click to Pay |
Data Type
Integer
EMVData Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
The EMV Data returned from a Pin Pad after reading an EMV card.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetEMVData();
int SetEMVData(const char* lpszEMVData); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetEMVData();
INT SetEMVData(LPCWSTR lpszEMVData);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getemvdata(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setemvdata(void* lpObj, const char* lpszEMVData);
QString GetEMVData();
int SetEMVData(QString qsEMVData);
Default Value
""
Remarks
This configuration setting takes the entire TLV (tag-length-value) response received from a Pin Pad after reading an EMV card. The class will send this data in an authorization request.
Retail EMV Example
Fdmsrcretail fdmsrcretail = new Fdmsrcretail();
fdmsrcretail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail;
fdmsrcretail.TPPID = "AAA000";
fdmsrcretail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
fdmsrcretail.MerchantId = "1234";
fdmsrcretail.GroupId = "20001";
fdmsrcretail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
fdmsrcretail.VisaIdentifier = "01000000000000";
fdmsrcretail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
fdmsrcretail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
fdmsrcretail.STAN = "112";
fdmsrcretail.TransactionNumber = "120013";
fdmsrcretail.ReferenceNumber = "123456";
fdmsrcretail.OrderNumber = "12000503";
fdmsrcretail.Card.MagneticStripe = "4761739001010010=15122011143804489";
fdmsrcretail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack2;
fdmsrcretail.TransactionAmount = "250";
fdmsrcretail.EMVData = "9F4005F000F0A0019F...F7906123456789012";
fdmsrcretail.Sale();
Data Type
String
GroupId Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
The Id assigned by FDMS to identify the merchant or group of merchants.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetGroupId();
int SetGroupId(const char* lpszGroupId); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetGroupId();
INT SetGroupId(LPCWSTR lpszGroupId);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getgroupid(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setgroupid(void* lpObj, const char* lpszGroupId);
QString GetGroupId();
int SetGroupId(QString qsGroupId);
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property specifies the FDMS assigned group Id. This Id identifies the merchant or group of merchants. This property is required.
Data Type
String
IndustryType Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
The merchant's industry type.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int GetIndustryType();
int SetIndustryType(int iIndustryType); Unicode (Windows) INT GetIndustryType();
INT SetIndustryType(INT iIndustryType);
Possible Values
FRIT_RETAIL(0),
FRIT_RESTAURANT(1),
FRIT_HOTEL(2)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getindustrytype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setindustrytype(void* lpObj, int iIndustryType);
int GetIndustryType();
int SetIndustryType(int iIndustryType);
Default Value
0
Remarks
The merchant's industry type. Possible values are:
0 (fritRetail - default) | Retail |
1 (fritRestaurant) | Restaurant |
2 (fritHotel) | Hotel |
Data Type
Integer
Level2 Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Specifies Level 2 (purchasing card information).
Syntax
DPaymentsSDKFDMSRcLevel2* GetLevel2(); int SetLevel2(DPaymentsSDKFDMSRcLevel2* val);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2customerreferencenumber(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2customerreferencenumber(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2CustomerReferenceNumber);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2destinationcountrycode(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2destinationcountrycode(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2DestinationCountryCode);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2destinationpostalcode(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2destinationpostalcode(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2DestinationPostalCode);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2discountamount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2discountamount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2DiscountAmount);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2dutyamount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2dutyamount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2DutyAmount);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2freightamount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2freightamount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2FreightAmount);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2merchanttaxid(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2merchanttaxid(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2MerchantTaxId);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2productdescription(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2productdescription(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2ProductDescription);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2purchaseidentifier(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2purchaseidentifier(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2PurchaseIdentifier);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2shipfrompostalcode(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2shipfrompostalcode(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2ShipFromPostalCode);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2taxamount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2taxamount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2TaxAmount);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2taxindicator(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2taxindicator(void* lpObj, int iLevel2TaxIndicator);
QString GetLevel2CustomerReferenceNumber();
int SetLevel2CustomerReferenceNumber(QString qsLevel2CustomerReferenceNumber); QString GetLevel2DestinationCountryCode();
int SetLevel2DestinationCountryCode(QString qsLevel2DestinationCountryCode); QString GetLevel2DestinationPostalCode();
int SetLevel2DestinationPostalCode(QString qsLevel2DestinationPostalCode); QString GetLevel2DiscountAmount();
int SetLevel2DiscountAmount(QString qsLevel2DiscountAmount); QString GetLevel2DutyAmount();
int SetLevel2DutyAmount(QString qsLevel2DutyAmount); QString GetLevel2FreightAmount();
int SetLevel2FreightAmount(QString qsLevel2FreightAmount); QString GetLevel2MerchantTaxId();
int SetLevel2MerchantTaxId(QString qsLevel2MerchantTaxId); QString GetLevel2ProductDescription();
int SetLevel2ProductDescription(QString qsLevel2ProductDescription); QString GetLevel2PurchaseIdentifier();
int SetLevel2PurchaseIdentifier(QString qsLevel2PurchaseIdentifier); QString GetLevel2ShipFromPostalCode();
int SetLevel2ShipFromPostalCode(QString qsLevel2ShipFromPostalCode); QString GetLevel2TaxAmount();
int SetLevel2TaxAmount(QString qsLevel2TaxAmount); int GetLevel2TaxIndicator();
int SetLevel2TaxIndicator(int iLevel2TaxIndicator);
Remarks
This property specifies Level 2 (purchasing card information).
The values required for Level 2 transaction depend on the card type. The following tables indicate which properties are valid for what card type:
American Express
- CustomerReferenceNumber (required if TaxAmount specified)
- DestinationPostalCode (required)
- DiscountAmount (required if discount applied)
- DutyAmount (required if duty amount applied)
- FreightAmount (required if freight amount applied)
- ProductDescription (required)
- PurchaseIdentifier (required)
- MerchantTaxId
- ShipFromPostalCode
- TaxAmount
- TaxIndicator
- CustomerReferenceNumber (required if TaxAmount specified)
- DiscountAmount (required if discount applied)
- DutyAmount (required if duty amount applied)
- FreightAmount (required if freight amount applied)
- PurchaseIdentifier (required)
- TaxAmount (required if TaxIndicator indicates tax is applied)
- TaxIndicator (required)
- DestinationPostalCode
- ShipFromPostalCode
- MerchantTaxId
- CustomerReferenceNumber (required if TaxAmount specified)
- DiscountAmount (required if discount applied)
- DutyAmount (required if duty amount applied)
- FreightAmount (required if freight amount applied)
- MerchantTaxId (required)
- PurchaseIdentifier (required)
- TaxAmount (required if TaxIndicator indicates tax is applied)
- TaxIndicator (required)
- DestinationPostalCode
- ShipFromPostalCode
Data Type
MerchantId Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
A unique Id used to identify the merchant within the FDMS and Datawire systems.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetMerchantId();
int SetMerchantId(const char* lpszMerchantId); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMerchantId();
INT SetMerchantId(LPCWSTR lpszMerchantId);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmerchantid(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmerchantid(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMerchantId);
QString GetMerchantId();
int SetMerchantId(QString qsMerchantId);
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property holds the Merchant Id assigned by FDMS. The value is an alphanumeric value up to 16 characters in length.
This property is required.
Data Type
String
MerchantServicePhone Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
The merchant's phone number, used to assist cardholders.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetMerchantServicePhone();
int SetMerchantServicePhone(const char* lpszMerchantServicePhone); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMerchantServicePhone();
INT SetMerchantServicePhone(LPCWSTR lpszMerchantServicePhone);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmerchantservicephone(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmerchantservicephone(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMerchantServicePhone);
QString GetMerchantServicePhone();
int SetMerchantServicePhone(QString qsMerchantServicePhone);
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property specifies a 10 digit phone number which cardholders can call for assistance.
This value is required for MOTO transactions. It is recommended but not required for ecommerce and hotel transactions.
Data Type
String
MerchantTerminalNumber Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Used to identify a unique terminal within a merchant location.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetMerchantTerminalNumber();
int SetMerchantTerminalNumber(const char* lpszMerchantTerminalNumber); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMerchantTerminalNumber();
INT SetMerchantTerminalNumber(LPCWSTR lpszMerchantTerminalNumber);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmerchantterminalnumber(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmerchantterminalnumber(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMerchantTerminalNumber);
QString GetMerchantTerminalNumber();
int SetMerchantTerminalNumber(QString qsMerchantTerminalNumber);
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property contains a number assigned by FDMS to uniquely identify a terminal within a merchant location. The value is numeric and may be up to 8 digits in length.
This property is required.
Data Type
String
MerchantURL Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
The URL of the site performing the ECommerce transaction.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetMerchantURL();
int SetMerchantURL(const char* lpszMerchantURL); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMerchantURL();
INT SetMerchantURL(LPCWSTR lpszMerchantURL);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmerchanturl(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmerchanturl(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMerchantURL);
QString GetMerchantURL();
int SetMerchantURL(QString qsMerchantURL);
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property specifies the URL of the merchant's site. This value is required for ECommerce and Hotel AuthOnly, Sale, Capture, and Credit transactions.
For Visa and Discover transactions this value is limited to 13 characters. For all other card types this value is limited to 32 characters.
Data Type
String
OrderNumber Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
A merchant assigned order number to uniquely reference the transaction.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetOrderNumber();
int SetOrderNumber(const char* lpszOrderNumber); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetOrderNumber();
INT SetOrderNumber(LPCWSTR lpszOrderNumber);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getordernumber(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setordernumber(void* lpObj, const char* lpszOrderNumber);
QString GetOrderNumber();
int SetOrderNumber(QString qsOrderNumber);
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property holds a merchant assigned order number that uniquely identifies the transaction. This must hold a numeric value up to 8 digits in length. This value cannot be all zeros.
This value is required for ECommerce and MOTO transactions. This value is optional for Retail transactions.
Data Type
String
Proxy Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
A set of properties related to proxy access.
Syntax
DPaymentsSDKProxy* GetProxy(); int SetProxy(DPaymentsSDKProxy* val);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getproxyauthscheme(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setproxyauthscheme(void* lpObj, int iProxyAuthScheme);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getproxyautodetect(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setproxyautodetect(void* lpObj, int bProxyAutoDetect);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getproxypassword(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setproxypassword(void* lpObj, const char* lpszProxyPassword);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getproxyport(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setproxyport(void* lpObj, int iProxyPort);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getproxyserver(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setproxyserver(void* lpObj, const char* lpszProxyServer);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getproxyssl(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setproxyssl(void* lpObj, int iProxySSL);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getproxyuser(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setproxyuser(void* lpObj, const char* lpszProxyUser);
int GetProxyAuthScheme();
int SetProxyAuthScheme(int iProxyAuthScheme); bool GetProxyAutoDetect();
int SetProxyAutoDetect(bool bProxyAutoDetect); QString GetProxyPassword();
int SetProxyPassword(QString qsProxyPassword); int GetProxyPort();
int SetProxyPort(int iProxyPort); QString GetProxyServer();
int SetProxyServer(QString qsProxyServer); int GetProxySSL();
int SetProxySSL(int iProxySSL); QString GetProxyUser();
int SetProxyUser(QString qsProxyUser);
Remarks
This property contains fields describing the proxy through which the class will attempt to connect.
Data Type
ReferenceNumber Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
A value assigned by the merchant to uniquely reference a transaction and any subsequent related transactions.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetReferenceNumber();
int SetReferenceNumber(const char* lpszReferenceNumber); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetReferenceNumber();
INT SetReferenceNumber(LPCWSTR lpszReferenceNumber);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getreferencenumber(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setreferencenumber(void* lpObj, const char* lpszReferenceNumber);
QString GetReferenceNumber();
int SetReferenceNumber(QString qsReferenceNumber);
Default Value
""
Remarks
This value is a merchant assigned 12 digit value. The value must be unique within a day for a given merchant id and terminal id. When performing a Capture or Reverse transaction this must be the same as the original transaction.
Data Type
String
Response Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Contains the response to an authorization request.
Syntax
DPaymentsSDKFDMSRcResponse* GetResponse();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseapprovalcode(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseauthorizedamount(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseauthorizingnetworkid(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseauthorizingnetworkname(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseavsresult(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsebalance(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsecardlevelresult(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsecode(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsecommercialcard(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsecvvresult(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsedatawirereturncode(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsedatawirestatus(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseemvdata(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseposdata(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsereturnedaci(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseroutingindicator(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsesettlementdate(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsetext(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsetransactiondate(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsetransactionid(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseApprovalCode(); QString GetResponseAuthorizedAmount(); QString GetResponseAuthorizingNetworkId(); QString GetResponseAuthorizingNetworkName(); QString GetResponseAVSResult(); QString GetResponseBalance(); QString GetResponseCardLevelResult(); QString GetResponseCode(); int GetResponseCommercialCard(); QString GetResponseCVVResult(); QString GetResponseDatawireReturnCode(); QString GetResponseDatawireStatus(); QString GetResponseEMVData(); QString GetResponsePOSData(); QString GetResponseReturnedACI(); QString GetResponseRoutingIndicator(); QString GetResponseSettlementDate(); QString GetResponseText(); QString GetResponseTransactionDate(); QString GetResponseTransactionId();
Remarks
This property will contain the response returned from the FDMS server. It should be inspected (and logged) after an authorization to determine if the transaction was approved. The FDMSRcResponse type contains the following fields:
ApprovalCode | The Approval Code returned from the server after a successful authorization. |
AuthorizedAmount | When supporting partial authorizations, this is the amount actually charged to the credit card. |
AuthorizingNetworkId | The network Id as returned by the host, if available. |
AuthorizingNetworkName | The authorizing network name as returned by the host, when available. |
AVSResult | Contains the Address Verification System result code. |
Balance | Contains the remaining available balance left on a prepaid card. |
CardLevelResult | Two character card level results field returned in the response to Visa authorizations. |
Code | Contains the 3 digit response code indicating success or reason of failure. |
CommercialCard | Indicates whether the credit card charged is a corporate commercial card (and if so the type of commercial card). |
CVVResult | Contains the returned CVV result code (if CVV data was sent in the request). |
DatawireReturnCode | Contains an error code providing more details about the DatawireStatus received. |
DatawireStatus | Status of the communication with Datawire. |
EMVData | The EMV data returned in the response (if any). |
POSData | Transaction specific information returned by the issuer (if any). |
ReturnedACI | Returned Authorization Characteristics Indicator contains CPS qualification status. |
RoutingIndicator | Whether the transaction was processed as Credit or Debit. |
SettlementDate | The date the transaction will be settled in the format MMDD. |
Text | Additional text which describes the reason for a decline, the field in error, etc. |
TransactionDate | The transaction date returned from the server in YYYYMMDDhhmmss format. |
TransactionId | The card issuer's Transaction Reference Number. |
This property is read-only.
Data Type
ReversalTransactionType Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
The type of transaction to reverse.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int GetReversalTransactionType();
int SetReversalTransactionType(int iReversalTransactionType); Unicode (Windows) INT GetReversalTransactionType();
INT SetReversalTransactionType(INT iReversalTransactionType);
Possible Values
FRTT_AUTH_ONLY(0),
FRTT_CAPTURE(1),
FRTT_CREDIT(2),
FRTT_SALE(3)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getreversaltransactiontype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setreversaltransactiontype(void* lpObj, int iReversalTransactionType);
int GetReversalTransactionType();
int SetReversalTransactionType(int iReversalTransactionType);
Default Value
0
Remarks
This property specifies the type of transaction to reverse. Possible values are:
0 (frttAuthOnly - default | AuthOnly. |
1 (frttCapture) | Capture. Only applicable when ReversalType is set to frtTimeoutReversal. |
2 (frttCredit) | Credit. Only applicable when ReversalType is set to frtTimeoutReversal. |
3 (frttSale) | Sale. |
Data Type
Integer
ReversalType Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
The type of reversal.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int GetReversalType();
int SetReversalType(int iReversalType); Unicode (Windows) INT GetReversalType();
INT SetReversalType(INT iReversalType);
Possible Values
FRT_FULL_REVERSAL(0),
FRT_TIMEOUT_REVERSAL(1),
FRT_VOID_FOR_SUSPECTED_FRAUD(2),
FRT_PARTIAL_REVERSAL(3)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getreversaltype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setreversaltype(void* lpObj, int iReversalType);
int GetReversalType();
int SetReversalType(int iReversalType);
Default Value
0
Remarks
This property specifies the type of reversal. Possible values are:
0 (frtFullReversal - default) | Void / Full Reversal |
1 (frtTimeoutReversal) | Timeout Reversal |
2 (frtVoidForSuspectedFraud) | Full Reversal with suspected fraud as the reason. This is only applicable to MasterCard. |
3 (frtPartialReversal) | Partial Reversal |
Timeout Reversals are applicable to the following transaction types:
Full Reversals are applicable to the following transaction types:
Data Type
Integer
SettlementMode Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Indicates whether the class uses Host Capture (0) or Terminal Capture (1) system.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int GetSettlementMode();
int SetSettlementMode(int iSettlementMode); Unicode (Windows) INT GetSettlementMode();
INT SetSettlementMode(INT iSettlementMode);
Possible Values
SMI_HOST_CAPTURE(0),
SMI_TERMINAL_CAPTURE(1)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsettlementmode(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsettlementmode(void* lpObj, int iSettlementMode);
int GetSettlementMode();
int SetSettlementMode(int iSettlementMode);
Default Value
0
Remarks
Possible values are:
0 (smiHostCapture - default) | Host Capture |
1 (smiTerminalCapture) | Terminal Capture |
Host-Capture means that you authorize your transactions using the AuthOnly or Sale methods, and you process refunds and capture outstanding authorizations with the Credit and Capture methods. FDMS Rapid Connect handles all batch management.
Terminal-Capture means that you handle all of the batch management yourself. This is necessary for the Hotel/Lodging IndustryType, because the final settlement amount may be more than (or less than) the amount that was originally authorized. For instance, a customer may stay longer or shorter than originally planned, or incur additional charges (mini bar, telephone call, room service, etc), and the settlement amount must be adjusted accordingly.
All industry types may be processed in Terminal Capture mode. However, Hotel/Lodging transactions MUST be authorized and settled in Terminal Capture mode. Attempting to authorize a Hotel/Lodging transaction with the Host Capture mode will cause the class fails with an error.
Data Type
Integer
SSLAcceptServerCert Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Instructs the class to unconditionally accept the server certificate that matches the supplied certificate.
Syntax
DPaymentsSDKCertificate* GetSSLAcceptServerCert(); int SetSSLAcceptServerCert(DPaymentsSDKCertificate* val);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercerteffectivedate(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertexpirationdate(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertextendedkeyusage(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertfingerprint(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertfingerprintsha1(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertfingerprintsha256(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertissuer(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertprivatekey(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertprivatekeyavailable(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertprivatekeycontainer(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertpublickey(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertpublickeyalgorithm(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertpublickeylength(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertserialnumber(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertsignaturealgorithm(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertstore(void* lpObj, char** lpSSLAcceptServerCertStore, int* lenSSLAcceptServerCertStore);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslacceptservercertstore(void* lpObj, const char* lpSSLAcceptServerCertStore, int lenSSLAcceptServerCertStore);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertstorepassword(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslacceptservercertstorepassword(void* lpObj, const char* lpszSSLAcceptServerCertStorePassword);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertstoretype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslacceptservercertstoretype(void* lpObj, int iSSLAcceptServerCertStoreType);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertsubjectaltnames(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertthumbprintmd5(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertthumbprintsha1(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertthumbprintsha256(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertusage(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertusageflags(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertversion(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertsubject(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslacceptservercertsubject(void* lpObj, const char* lpszSSLAcceptServerCertSubject);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertencoded(void* lpObj, char** lpSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded, int* lenSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslacceptservercertencoded(void* lpObj, const char* lpSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded, int lenSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded);
QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertEffectiveDate(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertExpirationDate(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertExtendedKeyUsage(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertFingerprint(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertFingerprintSHA1(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertFingerprintSHA256(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertIssuer(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertPrivateKey(); bool GetSSLAcceptServerCertPrivateKeyAvailable(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertPrivateKeyContainer(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertPublicKey(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertPublicKeyAlgorithm(); int GetSSLAcceptServerCertPublicKeyLength(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertSerialNumber(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertSignatureAlgorithm(); QByteArray GetSSLAcceptServerCertStore();
int SetSSLAcceptServerCertStore(QByteArray qbaSSLAcceptServerCertStore); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertStorePassword();
int SetSSLAcceptServerCertStorePassword(QString qsSSLAcceptServerCertStorePassword); int GetSSLAcceptServerCertStoreType();
int SetSSLAcceptServerCertStoreType(int iSSLAcceptServerCertStoreType); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertSubjectAltNames(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertThumbprintMD5(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertThumbprintSHA1(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertThumbprintSHA256(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertUsage(); int GetSSLAcceptServerCertUsageFlags(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertVersion(); QString GetSSLAcceptServerCertSubject();
int SetSSLAcceptServerCertSubject(QString qsSSLAcceptServerCertSubject); QByteArray GetSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded();
int SetSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded(QByteArray qbaSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded);
Remarks
If it finds any issues with the certificate presented by the server, the class will normally terminate the connection with an error.
You may override this behavior by supplying a value for SSLAcceptServerCert. If the certificate supplied in SSLAcceptServerCert is the same as the certificate presented by the server, then the server certificate is accepted unconditionally, and the connection will continue normally.
Note: This functionality is provided only for cases in which you otherwise know that you are communicating with the right server. If used improperly, this property may create a security breach. Use it at your own risk.
Data Type
SSLCert Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
The certificate to be used during Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) negotiation.
Syntax
DPaymentsSDKCertificate* GetSSLCert(); int SetSSLCert(DPaymentsSDKCertificate* val);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcerteffectivedate(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertexpirationdate(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertextendedkeyusage(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertfingerprint(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertfingerprintsha1(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertfingerprintsha256(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertissuer(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertprivatekey(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertprivatekeyavailable(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertprivatekeycontainer(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertpublickey(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertpublickeyalgorithm(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertpublickeylength(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertserialnumber(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertsignaturealgorithm(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertstore(void* lpObj, char** lpSSLCertStore, int* lenSSLCertStore);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslcertstore(void* lpObj, const char* lpSSLCertStore, int lenSSLCertStore);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertstorepassword(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslcertstorepassword(void* lpObj, const char* lpszSSLCertStorePassword);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertstoretype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslcertstoretype(void* lpObj, int iSSLCertStoreType);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertsubjectaltnames(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertthumbprintmd5(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertthumbprintsha1(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertthumbprintsha256(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertusage(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertusageflags(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertversion(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertsubject(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslcertsubject(void* lpObj, const char* lpszSSLCertSubject);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertencoded(void* lpObj, char** lpSSLCertEncoded, int* lenSSLCertEncoded);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslcertencoded(void* lpObj, const char* lpSSLCertEncoded, int lenSSLCertEncoded);
QString GetSSLCertEffectiveDate(); QString GetSSLCertExpirationDate(); QString GetSSLCertExtendedKeyUsage(); QString GetSSLCertFingerprint(); QString GetSSLCertFingerprintSHA1(); QString GetSSLCertFingerprintSHA256(); QString GetSSLCertIssuer(); QString GetSSLCertPrivateKey(); bool GetSSLCertPrivateKeyAvailable(); QString GetSSLCertPrivateKeyContainer(); QString GetSSLCertPublicKey(); QString GetSSLCertPublicKeyAlgorithm(); int GetSSLCertPublicKeyLength(); QString GetSSLCertSerialNumber(); QString GetSSLCertSignatureAlgorithm(); QByteArray GetSSLCertStore();
int SetSSLCertStore(QByteArray qbaSSLCertStore); QString GetSSLCertStorePassword();
int SetSSLCertStorePassword(QString qsSSLCertStorePassword); int GetSSLCertStoreType();
int SetSSLCertStoreType(int iSSLCertStoreType); QString GetSSLCertSubjectAltNames(); QString GetSSLCertThumbprintMD5(); QString GetSSLCertThumbprintSHA1(); QString GetSSLCertThumbprintSHA256(); QString GetSSLCertUsage(); int GetSSLCertUsageFlags(); QString GetSSLCertVersion(); QString GetSSLCertSubject();
int SetSSLCertSubject(QString qsSSLCertSubject); QByteArray GetSSLCertEncoded();
int SetSSLCertEncoded(QByteArray qbaSSLCertEncoded);
Remarks
This property includes the digital certificate that the class will use during SSL negotiation. Set this property to a valid certificate before starting SSL negotiation. To set a certificate, you may set the Encoded field to the encoded certificate. To select a certificate, use the store and subject fields.
Data Type
SSLProvider Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
The Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security (SSL/TLS) implementation to use.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int GetSSLProvider();
int SetSSLProvider(int iSSLProvider); Unicode (Windows) INT GetSSLProvider();
INT SetSSLProvider(INT iSSLProvider);
Possible Values
SSLP_AUTOMATIC(0),
SSLP_PLATFORM(1),
SSLP_INTERNAL(2)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslprovider(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslprovider(void* lpObj, int iSSLProvider);
int GetSSLProvider();
int SetSSLProvider(int iSSLProvider);
Default Value
0
Remarks
This property specifies the SSL/TLS implementation to use. In most cases the default value of 0 (Automatic) is recommended and should not be changed. When set to 0 (Automatic), the class will select whether to use the platform implementation or the internal implementation depending on the operating system as well as the TLS version being used.
Possible values are as follows:
0 (sslpAutomatic - default) | Automatically selects the appropriate implementation. |
1 (sslpPlatform) | Uses the platform/system implementation. |
2 (sslpInternal) | Uses the internal implementation. |
In most cases using the default value (Automatic) is recommended. The class will select a provider depending on the current platform.
When Automatic is selected, on Windows, the class will use the platform implementation. On Linux/macOS, the class will use the internal implementation. When TLS 1.3 is enabled via SSLEnabledProtocols, the internal implementation is used on all platforms.
Data Type
Integer
SSLServerCert Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
The server certificate for the last established connection.
Syntax
DPaymentsSDKCertificate* GetSSLServerCert();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercerteffectivedate(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertexpirationdate(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertextendedkeyusage(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertfingerprint(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertfingerprintsha1(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertfingerprintsha256(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertissuer(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertprivatekey(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertprivatekeyavailable(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertprivatekeycontainer(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertpublickey(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertpublickeyalgorithm(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertpublickeylength(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertserialnumber(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertsignaturealgorithm(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertstore(void* lpObj, char** lpSSLServerCertStore, int* lenSSLServerCertStore);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertstorepassword(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertstoretype(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertsubjectaltnames(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertthumbprintmd5(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertthumbprintsha1(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertthumbprintsha256(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertusage(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertusageflags(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertversion(void* lpObj);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertsubject(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertencoded(void* lpObj, char** lpSSLServerCertEncoded, int* lenSSLServerCertEncoded);
QString GetSSLServerCertEffectiveDate(); QString GetSSLServerCertExpirationDate(); QString GetSSLServerCertExtendedKeyUsage(); QString GetSSLServerCertFingerprint(); QString GetSSLServerCertFingerprintSHA1(); QString GetSSLServerCertFingerprintSHA256(); QString GetSSLServerCertIssuer(); QString GetSSLServerCertPrivateKey(); bool GetSSLServerCertPrivateKeyAvailable(); QString GetSSLServerCertPrivateKeyContainer(); QString GetSSLServerCertPublicKey(); QString GetSSLServerCertPublicKeyAlgorithm(); int GetSSLServerCertPublicKeyLength(); QString GetSSLServerCertSerialNumber(); QString GetSSLServerCertSignatureAlgorithm(); QByteArray GetSSLServerCertStore(); QString GetSSLServerCertStorePassword(); int GetSSLServerCertStoreType(); QString GetSSLServerCertSubjectAltNames(); QString GetSSLServerCertThumbprintMD5(); QString GetSSLServerCertThumbprintSHA1(); QString GetSSLServerCertThumbprintSHA256(); QString GetSSLServerCertUsage(); int GetSSLServerCertUsageFlags(); QString GetSSLServerCertVersion(); QString GetSSLServerCertSubject(); QByteArray GetSSLServerCertEncoded();
Remarks
This property contains the server certificate for the last established connection.
SSLServerCert is reset every time a new connection is attempted.
This property is read-only.
Data Type
STAN Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
The merchant assigned System Trace Audit Number(STAN).
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetSTAN();
int SetSTAN(const char* lpszSTAN); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetSTAN();
INT SetSTAN(LPCWSTR lpszSTAN);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getstan(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setstan(void* lpObj, const char* lpszSTAN);
QString GetSTAN();
int SetSTAN(QString qsSTAN);
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property represents a six digit number assigned by the merchant to uniquely reference the transaction. This number must be unique within a day per Merchant ID and Terminal ID.
Valid values are from 000001 to 999999 inclusive.
Data Type
String
Timeout Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
A timeout for the class.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int GetTimeout();
int SetTimeout(int iTimeout); Unicode (Windows) INT GetTimeout();
INT SetTimeout(INT iTimeout);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_gettimeout(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_settimeout(void* lpObj, int iTimeout);
int GetTimeout();
int SetTimeout(int iTimeout);
Default Value
30
Remarks
If Timeout is set to a positive value, and an operation cannot be completed immediately, the class will return with an error after Timeout seconds.
The default value for Timeout is 30 (seconds).
Data Type
Integer
TPPID Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Third Party Processor Identifier assigned by FDMS.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetTPPID();
int SetTPPID(const char* lpszTPPID); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetTPPID();
INT SetTPPID(LPCWSTR lpszTPPID);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_gettppid(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_settppid(void* lpObj, const char* lpszTPPID);
QString GetTPPID();
int SetTPPID(QString qsTPPID);
Default Value
""
Remarks
The Third Party Processor Identifier (TPPID. Also sometimes referred to as a "Vendor Id") is assigned by FDMS to each third party who is processing transactions. Each merchant will receive a TPPID from FDMS.
The default value is "" (empty string). This should be set to the FDMS assigned TPPID.
A VisaIdentifier is also required for Visa transactions.
Data Type
String
TransactionAmount Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
The transaction amount to be authorized.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetTransactionAmount();
int SetTransactionAmount(const char* lpszTransactionAmount); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetTransactionAmount();
INT SetTransactionAmount(LPCWSTR lpszTransactionAmount);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_gettransactionamount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_settransactionamount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszTransactionAmount);
QString GetTransactionAmount();
int SetTransactionAmount(QString qsTransactionAmount);
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property contains the transaction amount to be authorized.
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.
The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.
Data Type
String
TransactionNumber Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Uniquely identifies the transaction.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetTransactionNumber();
int SetTransactionNumber(const char* lpszTransactionNumber); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetTransactionNumber();
INT SetTransactionNumber(LPCWSTR lpszTransactionNumber);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_gettransactionnumber(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_settransactionnumber(void* lpObj, const char* lpszTransactionNumber);
QString GetTransactionNumber();
int SetTransactionNumber(QString qsTransactionNumber);
Default Value
""
Remarks
The TransactionNumber (otherwise known as the Client Reference Number, or ClientRef) uniquely identifies the packet sent by the application to the Datawire system. This parameter stores some unique token of information, and is used to match the response to the initial request sent. For example, the client application could use a static counter that is increased with the each executed request.
For all classs except FDMSGiftCard the maximum length of this property is 14 alphanumeric characters.
The FDMS recommended format is "tttttttVnnnnrrr" where ttttttt is a 7 digit transaction id, V is a constant, and nnn is a 3 digit version number and rrr is a 3 digit revision number. The 6 digit version number is typically static but unique for an application (Example: Version 2.5 = tttttttV002500).
For the Rapid Connect platform, the 6 character version number should be your Project/TPPID value. The entire TransactionNumber must be unique within a 24 hour time period.
The FDMSGiftCard also passes this value to the FDMS Closed Loop Gift Card system as a transaction id, and therefore the following restrictions are enforced: The maximum length is 7 characters. If the first character is an 'X', the remaining characters must be in the range '0' through 'F', indicating a hexadecimal number. Otherwise the FDMS Closed Loop Gift Card system only allows digits in this property.
Data Type
String
URL Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Location of the Datawire server to which transactions are sent.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetURL();
int SetURL(const char* lpszURL); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetURL();
INT SetURL(LPCWSTR lpszURL);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_geturl(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_seturl(void* lpObj, const char* lpszURL);
QString GetURL();
int SetURL(QString qsURL);
Default Value
"https://staging1.datawire.net/sd/"
Remarks
This is the URL to which all authorization and settlement transactions are sent. This URL is acquired by using the FDMSRegister class. Once you Register and Activate the merchant using the FDMSRegister class, you may then do a Service Discovery. After sending a Service Discovery transaction, the Datawire system will return a list of transaction URLs. The URL from this list with the shortest round-trip transit time from a ping is the URL you should use here.
Note: By default, this property is populated with the Datawire Staging (test) server, and is not the correct URL to use in a production environment. In a production environment, this URL is supplied by the FDMSRegister class.
Data Type
String
VisaIdentifier Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Additional merchant identification field used when authorizing Visa transactions.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetVisaIdentifier();
int SetVisaIdentifier(const char* lpszVisaIdentifier); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetVisaIdentifier();
INT SetVisaIdentifier(LPCWSTR lpszVisaIdentifier);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getvisaidentifier(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setvisaidentifier(void* lpObj, const char* lpszVisaIdentifier);
QString GetVisaIdentifier();
int SetVisaIdentifier(QString qsVisaIdentifier);
Default Value
""
Remarks
First Data will require the Agent Identification Service from all Third Party Servicers (TPS) or Merchant Servicers (MS). Each Visa Agent Identifier in the chain is composed of the following pieces:
First (up to) 10 bytes: | The Business Identifier (BID) provided by Visa to Third Party Servicers (TPS). This value may be less than 10 bytes. |
Final 12 bytes: | Text representation of the hexadecimal Visa secret Agent Unique Account Result (AUAR). {0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, 0x05, 0xFF} will be represented as "0102030405FF". |
A VisaIdentifier (Agent Identification Service - AUAR) is required for Visa transactions. A VisaIdentifier value is assigned by Visa as part of their Trusted Agent Program (TAP). Therefore it is suggested that you contact your FDMS certification analyst as they should be able to provide you with further information and put you in contact with the required party at Visa. Unfortunately more specific information on this matter cannot be provided as we do not handle live customer data and thus are not required to register in this particular program. However below is some additional information in regards to the requirements of a Visa Identifier.
Any merchant that transmits, processes, or stores cardholder data on server(s) that you own, manage, or operate on behalf of your clients (who are other merchant account holders) must meet the PCI Data Security Standard and follow additional steps to register as a service provider. Applicable services commonly include webhosting, software as a service, or collecting payment on behalf of a client. Any company providing these services must register with Visa's Third Party Agent (TAP) program.
You can register for the Visa Third Party Agent Program at http://usa.visa.com/merchants/risk_management/third-party-registration.html
If you find that you are not required to register with this program you can send all spaces for the BID and all zeros for the AUAR for instance:
" 000000000000"
Data Type
String
AuthOnly Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Performs an authorization request.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int AuthOnly(); Unicode (Windows) INT AuthOnly();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_authonly(void* lpObj);
int AuthOnly();
Remarks
This method performs an authorization request. This transaction places a hold on the funds. To capture the funds the Capture method must be called.
After calling this method call GetDetailAggregate to generate a detail aggregate. The detail aggregate should be saved for use with Capture or Reverse later.
When ready to Capture or Reverse the transaction call SetDetailAggregate to the previously stored detail aggregate before calling the method.
After this method returns check the value of Code to determine if the transaction was successful.
Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the URL property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special Ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's ServiceDiscovery method).
Retail AuthOnly Example
retail.TPPID = "AAA000";
retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
retail.MerchantId = "1234";
retail.GroupId = "20001";
retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail;
retail.STAN = "112";
retail.TransactionNumber = "1234";
retail.OrderNumber = "123";
retail.TransactionAmount = "1200";
retail.ReferenceNumber = "123";
retail.Card.MagneticStripe = "B4012000033330026^FDCS TEST CARD /VISA^170410054321000000000000000 150 A";
retail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack1;
retail.AuthOnly();
Error Handling (C++)
This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)
BalanceInquiry Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Performs a Balance Inquiry Request using the specified Card data.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int BalanceInquiry(); Unicode (Windows) INT BalanceInquiry();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_balanceinquiry(void* lpObj);
int BalanceInquiry();
Remarks
This methods allows you to perform a Balance Inquiry Request using the specified Card data. The balance amount will be returned via Balance. Note that Balance Inquiries do not place a hold on a cardholder's funds and are not captured.
Note: This method is only applicable to swiped MasterCards.
Error Handling (C++)
This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)
Capture Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Captures a previously authorized transaction.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int Capture(); Unicode (Windows) INT Capture();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_capture(void* lpObj);
int Capture();
Remarks
This method captures a previously authorized transaction. Before calling this method call SetDetailAggregate to specify the detail aggregate from the original AuthOnly transaction.
After this method returns check the value of Code to determine if the transaction was successful.
FDMS Recommendations:
Vendors/Gateways, who systematically send all Capture transactions during their end of day processing or at a specific time for their entire chain, must configure/program their systems to send the Capture transactions for all locations or merchants varying times of day based on the MerchantId or MerchantTerminalNumber (whichever provides a more random value).
To assist with implementing this logic, FDMS Rapid Connect recommends sending the Capture transactions based on the MerchantTerminalNumber in each location. For example If the last digit of the MerchantTerminalNumber is 0, set the time for the Capture transactions to be sent as xx:00 (xx=hh:00=mm). The time for the MerchantTerminalNumber ending with 1 would be xx:05. The time for the MerchantTerminalNumber ending with 2 would be xx:10. All remaining MerchantTerminalNumbers would follow this same logic. This logic would be applied across the entire chain or merchant base, to ensure that all Captures for all merchants are not systematically sent to First Data at the same time. FDMS recommends that the software calculate the offset of time based on the MerchantId or MerchantTerminalNumber, and not rely on a user to specify the time as noted above.
Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the URL property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special Ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's ServiceDiscovery method).
Retail AuthOnly and Capture Example
retail.TPPID = "AAA000";
retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
retail.MerchantId = "1234";
retail.GroupId = "20001";
retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail;
retail.STAN = "112";
retail.TransactionNumber = "1234";
retail.OrderNumber = "123";
retail.ReferenceNumber = "123456";
retail.TransactionAmount = "1200";
retail.Card.MagneticStripe = "B4012000033330026^FDCS TEST CARD /VISA^170410054321000000000000000 150 A";
retail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack1;
retail.AuthOnly();
string aggregate = retail.GetDetailAggregate();
//Capture
retail = new Fdmsrcretail();
retail.TPPID = "AAA000";
retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
retail.MerchantId = "1234";
retail.GroupId = "20001";
retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail;
retail.STAN = "113";
retail.TransactionNumber = "1235";
retail.ReferenceNumber = "123457";
retail.SetDetailAggregate(aggregate);
//The TransactionAmount is populated when SetDetailAggregate is called.
//TransactionAmount may be set to a different amount when capturing,
//for instance to include Gratuity.
retail.TransactionAmount = "1600";
retail.Capture();
Error Handling (C++)
This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)
Config Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Sets or retrieves a configuration setting.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* Config(const char* lpszConfigurationString); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR Config(LPCWSTR lpszConfigurationString);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_config(void* lpObj, const char* lpszConfigurationString);
QString Config(const QString& qsConfigurationString);
Remarks
Config is a generic method available in every class. It is used to set and retrieve configuration settings for the class.
These settings are similar in functionality to properties, but they are rarely used. In order to avoid "polluting" the property namespace of the class, access to these internal properties is provided through the Config method.
To set a configuration setting named PROPERTY, you must call Config("PROPERTY=VALUE"), where VALUE is the value of the setting expressed as a string. For boolean values, use the strings "True", "False", "0", "1", "Yes", or "No" (case does not matter).
To read (query) the value of a configuration setting, you must call Config("PROPERTY"). The value will be returned as a string.
Error Handling (C++)
This method returns a String value; after it returns, call the GetLastErrorCode() method to obtain its result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message.
Credit Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Submits a credit transaction.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int Credit(); Unicode (Windows) INT Credit();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_credit(void* lpObj);
int Credit();
Remarks
This method credits funds to the card. This is not based on a previous transaction. This may be used to return funds to a card if a previous transaction has already been settled. To void or cancel a transaction before it has been settled call Reverse instead.
After this method returns check the value of Code to determine if the transaction was successful.
Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the URL property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special Ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's ServiceDiscovery method).
Retail Credit Example
retail.TPPID = "AAA000";
retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
retail.MerchantId = "1234";
retail.GroupId = "20001";
retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail;
retail.STAN = "112";
retail.TransactionNumber = "1234";
retail.OrderNumber = "123";
retail.ReferenceNumber = "123";
retail.TransactionAmount = "1200";
retail.Card.MagneticStripe = "B4012000033330026^FDCS TEST CARD /VISA^170410054321000000000000000 150 A";
retail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack1;
retail.Credit();
;
Error Handling (C++)
This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)
GetDetailAggregate Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Returns a detail aggregate containing details of this transaction, which is used for Capture or Reverse transactions or settlement when using Terminal Capture mode.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) char* GetDetailAggregate(); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetDetailAggregate();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getdetailaggregate(void* lpObj);
QString GetDetailAggregate();
Remarks
This method will return a detail aggregate representing the transaction. After calling AuthOnly or Sale call this method to obtain a detail aggregate. The aggregate will be required when calling Capture or Reverse.
When using Terminal Capture Settlement Mode this aggregate must be passed to the FDMSRcSettle class's DetailAggregate array property in order to settle the transaction. If you wish to view or change any part of the aggregate (such as adding a gratuity or additional info for an Installment payment), you may use the FDMSRcDetailrecord class to do so.
Note: This method may only be called after a successful authorization. If the authorization was not successful the method fails with an error.
To set the aggregate before calling Capture Reverse or SendSettlement call SetDetailAggregate. Save this aggregate in a secure location.
Error Handling (C++)
This method returns a String value; after it returns, call the GetLastErrorCode() method to obtain its result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message.
HostTotals Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Performs a Host Totals request.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int HostTotals(); Unicode (Windows) INT HostTotals();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_hosttotals(void* lpObj);
int HostTotals();
Remarks
This method performs a Host Totals transaction submitted to request a Host Totals Report for a particular day.
You need to set the required merchant password and report type fields using the HostTotalsPassword and HostTotalsType configuration settings, respectively.
Retail HostTotals Example
retail.TPPID = "AAA000";
retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
retail.MerchantId = "1234";
retail.GroupId = "20001";
retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
retail.STAN = "112";
retail.TransactionNumber = "1234";
retail.Config("CurrencyCode=840");
retail.Config("HostTotalsType=1");
retail.Config("HostTotalsPassword=111111");
retail.HostTotals();
Error Handling (C++)
This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)
Interrupt Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Interrupts the current action.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int Interrupt(); Unicode (Windows) INT Interrupt();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_interrupt(void* lpObj);
int Interrupt();
Remarks
This method interrupts any processing that the class is currently executing.
Error Handling (C++)
This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)
Reset Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Clears all properties to their default values.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int Reset(); Unicode (Windows) INT Reset();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_reset(void* lpObj);
int Reset();
Remarks
This method clears all properties to their default values.
Error Handling (C++)
This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)
Reverse Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Reverses a transaction.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int Reverse(); Unicode (Windows) INT Reverse();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_reverse(void* lpObj);
int Reverse();
Remarks
This method reverses a transaction that has not been settled.
To void/reverse a Sale or AuthOnly transaction first set ReversalTransactionType to specify the type of original transaction that is being reversed. Next set ReversalType to frtFullReversal and call this method.
If the previous transaction did not receive a response and the state of the transaction is uncertain you may perform a Timeout Reversal. To perform a timeout reversal set ReversalTransactionType to specify the type of original transaction that is being reversed. Next set ReversalType to frtTimeoutReversal and call this method.
Timeout Reversals are applicable to the following transaction types:
Full Reversals are applicable to the following transaction types:
After this method returns check the value of Code to determine if the transaction was successful.
Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the URL property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special Ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's ServiceDiscovery method).
Retail Sale and Reverse Example
retail.TPPID = "AAA000";
retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
retail.MerchantId = "1234";
retail.GroupId = "20001";
retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail;
retail.STAN = "112";
retail.TransactionNumber = "1234";
retail.OrderNumber = "123";
retail.ReferenceNumber = "123";
retail.TransactionAmount = "1200";
retail.Card.MagneticStripe = "B4012000033330026^FDCS TEST CARD /VISA^170410054321000000000000000 150 A";
retail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack1;
retail.Sale();
string aggregate = retail.GetDetailAggregate();
//Reverse
retail = new Fdmsrcretail();
retail.TPPID = "AAA000";
retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
retail.MerchantId = "1234";
retail.GroupId = "20001";
retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
retail.STAN = "113";
retail.TransactionNumber = "1235";
retail.ReferenceNumber = "123457";
retail.SetDetailAggregate(aggregate);
retail.Reverse();
Error Handling (C++)
This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)
Sale Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Performs a sale transaction.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int Sale(); Unicode (Windows) INT Sale();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_sale(void* lpObj);
int Sale();
Remarks
This method performs a sale transaction. Once a sale is performed no further action is needed, the funds will automatically be captured by FDMS.
After this method returns check the value of Code to determine if the transaction was successful.
Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the URL property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special Ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's ServiceDiscovery method).
Retail Sale Example
retail.TPPID = "AAA000";
retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
retail.MerchantId = "1234";
retail.GroupId = "20001";
retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail;
retail.STAN = "112";
retail.TransactionNumber = "1234";
retail.OrderNumber = "123";
retail.ReferenceNumber = "123";
retail.TransactionAmount = "1200";
retail.Card.MagneticStripe = "B4012000033330026^FDCS TEST CARD /VISA^170410054321000000000000000 150 A";
retail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack1;
retail.Sale();
Error Handling (C++)
This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)
SetDetailAggregate Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Specifies the detail aggregate before calling Capture or Reverse.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int SetDetailAggregate(const char* lpszaggregate); Unicode (Windows) INT SetDetailAggregate(LPCWSTR lpszaggregate);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setdetailaggregate(void* lpObj, const char* lpszaggregate);
int SetDetailAggregate(const QString& qsaggregate);
Remarks
This method specifies the detail aggregate from the original AuthOnly or Sale transaction. This must be set before calling Capture or Reverse.
The aggregate specified here should have been obtained from the GetDetailAggregate method after the original AuthOnly or Sale transaction.
Error Handling (C++)
This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)
VerifyCard Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Performs a zero dollar verification of the card.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) int VerifyCard(); Unicode (Windows) INT VerifyCard();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_verifycard(void* lpObj);
int VerifyCard();
Remarks
This method performs a card verification without charging any funds. This can be used to simply verify if the card is valid, or perform AVS and CVV checks without actually charging any funds to the card.
When calling this method TransactionAmount must be set to 0. Set either CustomerAddress or CustomerZip to perform AVS checks. Set CVVData to perform CVV checks.
The following combinations are supported:
Card Type | Verification | w/ AVS | w/ CVV | w/ AVS and CVV | Swiped w/ AVS |
Visa | Y | Y | Y | N | Y |
MasterCard | Y | Y | Y | Y | Y |
American Express | N | Y | N | N | Y |
Discover | Y | Y | Y | Y | Y |
JCB (Domestic US) | N | N | N | N | N |
Diners Club | Y | Y | Y | Y | Y |
Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the URL property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special Ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's ServiceDiscovery method).
Retail VerifyCard Example
retail.TPPID = "AAA000";
retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
retail.MerchantId = "1234";
retail.GroupId = "20001";
retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail;
retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
retail.STAN = "112";
retail.TransactionNumber = "1234";
retail.ReferenceNumber = "123";
retail.TransactionAmount = "0";
retail.CustomerZip = "11747";
//Card data can be swiped or manually keyed
retail.Card.Number = "373953123443227";
retail.Card.ExpMonth = 12;
retail.Card.ExpYear = 2018;
retail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsManualEntryTrack1Capable;
retail.VerifyCard();
Error Handling (C++)
This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)
Connected Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Fired immediately after a connection completes (or fails).
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) virtual int FireConnected(FDMSRcRetailConnectedEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
int StatusCode;
const char *Description; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailConnectedEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireConnected(FDMSRcRetailConnectedEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
INT StatusCode;
LPCWSTR Description; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailConnectedEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_CONNECTED 1 virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireConnected(INT &iStatusCode, LPSTR &lpszDescription);
class FDMSRcRetailConnectedEventParams { public: int StatusCode(); const QString &Description(); int EventRetVal(); void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal); };
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void Connected(FDMSRcRetailConnectedEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireConnected(FDMSRcRetailConnectedEventParams *e) {...}
Remarks
If the connection is made normally, StatusCode is 0 and Description is "OK".
If the connection fails, StatusCode has the error code returned by the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)/IP stack. Description contains a description of this code. The value of StatusCode is equal to the value of the error.
Please refer to the Error Codes section for more information.
DataPacketIn Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Fired when receiving a data packet from the transaction server.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) virtual int FireDataPacketIn(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketInEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
const char *DataPacket; int lenDataPacket; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailDataPacketInEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireDataPacketIn(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketInEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
LPCSTR DataPacket; INT lenDataPacket; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailDataPacketInEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_DATAPACKETIN 2 virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireDataPacketIn(LPSTR &lpDataPacket, INT &lenDataPacket);
class FDMSRcRetailDataPacketInEventParams { public: const QByteArray &DataPacket(); int EventRetVal(); void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal); };
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void DataPacketIn(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketInEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireDataPacketIn(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketInEventParams *e) {...}
Remarks
This event fires when a packet is received. The entire data packet (including all framing and error detection characters) is contained in the parameter "DataPacket". This parameter may be inspected for advanced troubleshooting, or to extract additional response properties beyond the scope of this class.
DataPacketOut Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Fired when sending a data packet to the transaction server.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) virtual int FireDataPacketOut(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketOutEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
const char *DataPacket; int lenDataPacket; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailDataPacketOutEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireDataPacketOut(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketOutEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
LPCSTR DataPacket; INT lenDataPacket; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailDataPacketOutEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_DATAPACKETOUT 3 virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireDataPacketOut(LPSTR &lpDataPacket, INT &lenDataPacket);
class FDMSRcRetailDataPacketOutEventParams { public: const QByteArray &DataPacket(); int EventRetVal(); void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal); };
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void DataPacketOut(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketOutEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireDataPacketOut(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketOutEventParams *e) {...}
Remarks
This event fires right before each data packet is sent. The entire data packet (including all framing and error detection characters) is contained in the parameter "DataPacket". This parameter may be inspected for advanced troubleshooting, or may be modified to support additional features beyond the scope of this class.
Disconnected Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Fired when a connection is closed.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) virtual int FireDisconnected(FDMSRcRetailDisconnectedEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
int StatusCode;
const char *Description; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailDisconnectedEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireDisconnected(FDMSRcRetailDisconnectedEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
INT StatusCode;
LPCWSTR Description; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailDisconnectedEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_DISCONNECTED 4 virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireDisconnected(INT &iStatusCode, LPSTR &lpszDescription);
class FDMSRcRetailDisconnectedEventParams { public: int StatusCode(); const QString &Description(); int EventRetVal(); void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal); };
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void Disconnected(FDMSRcRetailDisconnectedEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireDisconnected(FDMSRcRetailDisconnectedEventParams *e) {...}
Remarks
If the connection is broken normally, StatusCode is 0 and Description is "OK".
If the connection is broken for any other reason, StatusCode has the error code returned by the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP/IP) subsystem. Description contains a description of this code. The value of StatusCode is equal to the value of the TCP/IP error.
Please refer to the Error Codes section for more information.
Error Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Fired when information is available about errors during data delivery.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) virtual int FireError(FDMSRcRetailErrorEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
int ErrorCode;
const char *Description; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailErrorEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireError(FDMSRcRetailErrorEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
INT ErrorCode;
LPCWSTR Description; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailErrorEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_ERROR 5 virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireError(INT &iErrorCode, LPSTR &lpszDescription);
class FDMSRcRetailErrorEventParams { public: int ErrorCode(); const QString &Description(); int EventRetVal(); void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal); };
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void Error(FDMSRcRetailErrorEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireError(FDMSRcRetailErrorEventParams *e) {...}
Remarks
The Error event is fired in case of exceptional conditions during message processing. Normally the class fails with an error.
The ErrorCode parameter contains an error code, and the Description parameter contains a textual description of the error. For a list of valid error codes and their descriptions, please refer to the Error Codes section.
SSLServerAuthentication Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Fired after the server presents its certificate to the client.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) virtual int FireSSLServerAuthentication(FDMSRcRetailSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
const char *CertEncoded; int lenCertEncoded;
const char *CertSubject;
const char *CertIssuer;
const char *Status;
int Accept; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireSSLServerAuthentication(FDMSRcRetailSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
LPCSTR CertEncoded; INT lenCertEncoded;
LPCWSTR CertSubject;
LPCWSTR CertIssuer;
LPCWSTR Status;
BOOL Accept; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_SSLSERVERAUTHENTICATION 6 virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireSSLServerAuthentication(LPSTR &lpCertEncoded, INT &lenCertEncoded, LPSTR &lpszCertSubject, LPSTR &lpszCertIssuer, LPSTR &lpszStatus, BOOL &bAccept);
class FDMSRcRetailSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams { public: const QByteArray &CertEncoded(); const QString &CertSubject(); const QString &CertIssuer(); const QString &Status(); bool Accept(); void SetAccept(bool bAccept); int EventRetVal(); void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal); };
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void SSLServerAuthentication(FDMSRcRetailSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireSSLServerAuthentication(FDMSRcRetailSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams *e) {...}
Remarks
During this event, the client can decide whether or not to continue with the connection process. The Accept parameter is a recommendation on whether to continue or close the connection. This is just a suggestion: application software must use its own logic to determine whether or not to continue.
When Accept is False, Status shows why the verification failed (otherwise, Status contains the string OK). If it is decided to continue, you can override and accept the certificate by setting the Accept parameter to True.
SSLStatus Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Fired when secure connection progress messages are available.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) virtual int FireSSLStatus(FDMSRcRetailSSLStatusEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
const char *Message; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailSSLStatusEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireSSLStatus(FDMSRcRetailSSLStatusEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
LPCWSTR Message; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailSSLStatusEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_SSLSTATUS 7 virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireSSLStatus(LPSTR &lpszMessage);
class FDMSRcRetailSSLStatusEventParams { public: const QString &Message(); int EventRetVal(); void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal); };
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void SSLStatus(FDMSRcRetailSSLStatusEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireSSLStatus(FDMSRcRetailSSLStatusEventParams *e) {...}
Remarks
The event is fired for informational and logging purposes only. This event tracks the progress of the connection.
Status Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Shows the progress of the FDMS/Datawire connection.
Syntax
ANSI (Cross Platform) virtual int FireStatus(FDMSRcRetailStatusEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
const char *Message; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailStatusEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireStatus(FDMSRcRetailStatusEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
LPCWSTR Message; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailStatusEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_STATUS 8 virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireStatus(LPSTR &lpszMessage);
class FDMSRcRetailStatusEventParams { public: const QString &Message(); int EventRetVal(); void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal); };
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void Status(FDMSRcRetailStatusEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireStatus(FDMSRcRetailStatusEventParams *e) {...}
Remarks
The event is fired for informational and logging purposes only. Used to track the progress of the connection.
CCCard Type
Contains the customer's credit card information.
Syntax
DPaymentsSDKCCCard (declared in dpaymentssdk.h)
Remarks
This type contains the customer's credit card information. If you are processing transactions where the customer and his credit card are physically present, set the MagneticStripe field with the data read from the card reader. You may set either Track1 or Track2 data (but not both). You must also set the EntryDataSource to indicate which track is stored in the MagneticStripe field.
Example: Setting the Fields
CCCard card = new CCCard();
card.MagneticStripe = "B4012000033330026^FDMS TEST CARD /VISA^090410054321000000000000000 150 A";
card.EntryDataSource = edsTrack1;
Example: Using a Constructor
CCCard card = new CCCard("B4012000033330026^FDMS TEST CARD /VISA^090410054321000000000000000 150 A", edsTrack1);
If you are processing a transaction where the credit card is not physically present (eCommerce, mail/order, etc) or if the magstripe on the back of the card cannot be read by the card reader, you must set the Number, ExpMonth, and ExpYear fields, and EntryDataSource must be set to one of the manually entered enumerations.
Example: Setting the Fields
CCCard card = new CCCard();
card.Number = "4788250000028291";
card.ExpMonth = 12;
card.ExpYear = 2010;
card.EntryDataSource = edsManualEntryNoCardReader;
Example: Using a Constructor
CCCard card = new CCCard("4012000033330026", 04, 2009);
Note that the constructor in the previous example automatically sets the EntryDataSource to edsManualEntryNoCardReader. If you wish to set any
other value for the EntryDataSource, you must set it yourself before authorizing the transaction.
When authorizing a transaction, the fields used by the class are solely dependant on the value of EntryDataSource. If you set the Number, ExpMonth, and ExpYear fields, but EntryDataSource is set to edsTrack2, the class will look for MagneticStripe data when authorizing the transaction, and will fails with an error because none is present.
Fields
CardType
int
Default Value: 0
Type of credit card being used in this transaction. This field contains the customer's credit card type. This is automatically computed after the Number is set, but it can also be changed manually. A list of valid card types is included below.
ctUnknown (0) | Invalid or unknown prefix, card type not known. |
ctVisa (1) | Visa or Delta Card. |
ctMasterCard (2) | MasterCard. |
ctAMEX (3) | American Express Card. |
ctDiscover (4) | Discover Card. |
ctDiners (5) | Diners Club or Carte Blanche Card. |
ctJCB (6) | JCB Card. |
ctVisaElectron (7) | Visa Electron Card (runs as a Visa for most gateways) |
ctMaestro (8) | Maestro Card |
ctLaser (10) | Laser Card (Ireland) |
CVVData
char*
Default Value: ""
Three digit security code on back of card (optional).
This alphanumeric field contains the three digit Visa "Card Verification Value" (CVV), MasterCard "Card Verification Code" (CVC), or four-digit American Express "Card Identification Number" (CID). This value appears as additional characters embossed on the card signature line following the credit card account number on the back of the credit card. This is an optional field which can be used to determine if the customer is actually in possession of the credit card.
Even if the CVVData is incorrect, the transaction may still be authorized. It is up to the merchant to examine the ResponseCVVResult field and decide whether to honor the transaction or not.
Note: When set to a non-empty value, CVVPresence will be automatically set to cvpProvided. If set to empty string (""), CVVPresence will be automatically set to cvpNotProvided.
CVVPresence
int
Default Value: 0
Indicates the presence of the card verification value.
This field is used to indicate the presence of CVVData.
The class will automatically set this value to cvpProvided when a CVVData value is specified. You can explicitly specify the CVVPresence indicator by setting this property.
Available values are:
- cvpNotProvided (0)
- cvpProvided (1)
- cvpIllegible (2)
- cvpNotOnCard (3)
EntryDataSource
int
Default Value: 0
This field contains a 1-character code identifying the source of the customer data. The table below shows all supported values for this field.
edsTrack1 (0) | Full Magnetic stripe read and transmit, Track 1. |
edsTrack2 (1) | Full magnetic stripe read and transmit, Track 2. |
edsManualEntryTrack1Capable (2) | Manually keyed, Track 1 capable. |
edsManualEntryTrack2Capable (3) | Manually keyed, Track 2 capable. |
edsManualEntryNoCardReader (4) | Manually keyed, terminal has no card reading capability (use this for e-commerce and MOTO transactions). |
edsTrack1Contactless (5) | Full magnetic stripe read (Track 1 only), Chip Card capable terminal (Visa, Mastercard, and JCB Transactions only). |
edsTrack2Contactless (6) | Full magnetic stripe read (Track 2 only), Chip Card capable terminal (Visa, Mastercard, and JCB Transactions only). |
edsManualEntryContactlessCapable (7) | Manually keyed, Chip Card read capable terminal (Visa, MasterCard, and JCB transactions only). |
edsIVR (8) | Interactive Voice Response processing. This is applicable to Mail Order/Telephone Order (MOTO) transactions. (Number, ExpMonth, and ExpYear are sent). |
edsKiosk (9) | Automated kiosk transaction. Track1 or Track2 data must be sent in MagneticStripe, the transaction cannot be manually entered. |
Below is a list of processors and their support EntryDataSource values:
FDMS - edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsManualEntryNoCardReader, edsTrack1Contactless, edsTrack2Contactless, edsManualEntryContactlessCapable, edsIVR, edsKiosk
FDMSOmaha - All EntryDataSources applicable
FDMS Rapid Connect - All EntryDataSources applicable
Global - edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsManualEntryNoCardReader, edsTrack1Contactless, edsTrack2Contactless, edsIVR, edsKiosk
PTech - edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsManualEntryNoCardReader, edsTrack1Contactless, edsTrack2Contactless, edsManualEntryContactlessCapable
TSYS - edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsManualEntryNoCardReader, edsTrack2Contactless, edsManualEntryContactlessCapable
TSYSHC - Values are based on Industry type.
TSYSHCBenefit | edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable |
TSYSHCECommerce | edsManualEntryNoCardReader |
TSYSHCRetail | edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsTrack1Contactless, edsTrack2Contactless, edsManualEntryContactlessCapable |
ExpMonth
int
Default Value: 1
Expiration month of the credit card specified in Number.
This field contains the expiration date of the customer's credit card, and must be in the range 1 - 12.
ExpYear
int
Default Value: 2000
Expiration year of the credit card specified in Number.
This field contains the expiration date of the customer's credit card. This field must be in the range 0 - 99, or 2000 - 2099. Any date before the year 2000 or after 2099 cannot be specified.
IsEncrypted
int
Default Value: FALSE
Determines whether data set to the Number or MagneticStripe fields is validated.
By default, when the Number or MagneticStripe fields are set, the value will be validated and normalized. For instance, "4444-33332222 1111" will be normalized as "4444333322221111" and MagneticStripe data will be parsed for the track specified by EntryDataSource. However, any other non-numerical data entered will cause an exception to be thrown. It may be useful in some gateways to send other data in the Number or MagneticStripe fields, and this can be accomplished by setting IsEncrypted to true. However, please note that in doing so automatic calculation of the CardType may be affected, and the card number will not be verified.
MagneticStripe
char*
Default Value: ""
Track data read off of the card's magnetic stripe.
If EntryDataSource is not one of the manually entered enumerations, then this field must be set with the track1 or track2 data from the magnetic stripe on the back of the customer's credit card. This includes everything after but not including the start sentinel (% or ;) and up to but not including the end sentinel (?) and LRC check character. You may only set this field with track 1 or track 2 data, and may not pass both. Use the EntryDataSource field to indicate which track you are sending.
The following example shows how to set the MagneticStripe and EntryDataSource fields if the data read off the card is "%B4788250000028291^TSYS^05121015432112345678?;4788250000028291=05121015432112345678?"
class.CardMagneticStripe = "B4788250000028291^TSYS^05121015432112345678"
class.CardEntryDataSource = edsTrack1
or
class.CardMagneticStripe = "4788250000028291=05121015432112345678"
class.CardEntryDataSource = edsTrack2
Industry regulations do not allow merchants or processors to store track data in any form of persistent storage. Failure to abide by this regulation can result in significant fines and other penalties.
Number
char*
Default Value: ""
Customer's credit card number for the transaction.
If you're sending the transaction with MagneticStripe data, this field should be left empty.
Constructors
CCCard()
CCCard(const char* lpszNumber, int iExpMonth, int iExpYear)
CCCard(const char* lpszMagneticStripe, int iEntryDataSource)
Certificate Type
This is the digital certificate being used.
Syntax
DPaymentsSDKCertificate (declared in dpaymentssdk.h)
Remarks
This type describes the current digital certificate. The certificate may be a public or private key. The fields are used to identify or select certificates.
- EffectiveDate
- ExpirationDate
- ExtendedKeyUsage
- Fingerprint
- FingerprintSHA1
- FingerprintSHA256
- Issuer
- PrivateKey
- PrivateKeyAvailable
- PrivateKeyContainer
- PublicKey
- PublicKeyAlgorithm
- PublicKeyLength
- SerialNumber
- SignatureAlgorithm
- Store
- StorePassword
- StoreType
- SubjectAltNames
- ThumbprintMD5
- ThumbprintSHA1
- ThumbprintSHA256
- Usage
- UsageFlags
- Version
- Subject
- Encoded
Fields
EffectiveDate
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The date on which this certificate becomes valid. Before this date, it is not valid. The date is localized to the system's time zone. The following example illustrates the format of an encoded date:
23-Jan-2000 15:00:00.
ExpirationDate
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The date on which the certificate expires. After this date, the certificate will no longer be valid. The date is localized to the system's time zone. The following example illustrates the format of an encoded date:
23-Jan-2001 15:00:00.
ExtendedKeyUsage
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
A comma-delimited list of extended key usage identifiers. These are the same as ASN.1 object identifiers (OIDs).
Fingerprint
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The hex-encoded, 16-byte MD5 fingerprint of the certificate. This property is primarily used for keys which do not have a corresponding X.509 public certificate, such as PEM keys that only contain a private key. It is commonly used for SSH keys.
The following example illustrates the format: bc:2a:72:af:fe:58:17:43:7a:5f:ba:5a:7c:90:f7:02
FingerprintSHA1
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The hex-encoded, 20-byte SHA-1 fingerprint of the certificate. This property is primarily used for keys which do not have a corresponding X.509 public certificate, such as PEM keys that only contain a private key. It is commonly used for SSH keys.
The following example illustrates the format: 30:7b:fa:38:65:83:ff:da:b4:4e:07:3f:17:b8:a4:ed:80:be:ff:84
FingerprintSHA256
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The hex-encoded, 32-byte SHA-256 fingerprint of the certificate. This property is primarily used for keys which do not have a corresponding X.509 public certificate, such as PEM keys that only contain a private key. It is commonly used for SSH keys.
The following example illustrates the format: 6a:80:5c:33:a9:43:ea:b0:96:12:8a:64:96:30:ef:4a:8a:96:86:ce:f4:c7:be:10:24:8e:2b:60:9e:f3:59:53
Issuer
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The issuer of the certificate. This field contains a string representation of the name of the issuing authority for the certificate.
PrivateKey
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The private key of the certificate (if available). The key is provided as PEM/Base64-encoded data.
Note: The PrivateKey may be available but not exportable. In this case, PrivateKey returns an empty string.
PrivateKeyAvailable
int (read-only)
Default Value: FALSE
Whether a PrivateKey is available for the selected certificate. If PrivateKeyAvailable is True, the certificate may be used for authentication purposes (e.g., server authentication).
PrivateKeyContainer
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The name of the PrivateKey container for the certificate (if available). This functionality is available only on Windows platforms.
PublicKey
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The public key of the certificate. The key is provided as PEM/Base64-encoded data.
PublicKeyAlgorithm
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The textual description of the certificate's public key algorithm. The property contains either the name of the algorithm (e.g., "RSA" or "RSA_DH") or an object identifier (OID) string representing the algorithm.
PublicKeyLength
int (read-only)
Default Value: 0
The length of the certificate's public key (in bits). Common values are 512, 1024, and 2048.
SerialNumber
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The serial number of the certificate encoded as a string. The number is encoded as a series of hexadecimal digits, with each pair representing a byte of the serial number.
SignatureAlgorithm
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The text description of the certificate's signature algorithm. The property contains either the name of the algorithm (e.g., "RSA" or "RSA_MD5RSA") or an object identifier (OID) string representing the algorithm.
Store
char*
Default Value: "MY"
The name of the certificate store for the client certificate.
The StoreType field denotes the type of the certificate store specified by Store. If the store is password-protected, specify the password in StorePassword.
Store is used in conjunction with the Subject field to specify client certificates. If Store has a value, and Subject or Encoded is set, a search for a certificate is initiated. Please see the Subject field for details.
Designations of certificate stores are platform dependent.
The following designations are the most common User and Machine certificate stores in Windows:
MY | A certificate store holding personal certificates with their associated private keys. |
CA | Certifying authority certificates. |
ROOT | Root certificates. |
When the certificate store type is cstPFXFile, this property must be set to the name of the file. When the type is cstPFXBlob, the property must be set to the binary contents of a PFX file (i.e., PKCS#12 certificate store).
StorePassword
char*
Default Value: ""
If the type of certificate store requires a password, this field is used to specify the password needed to open the certificate store.
StoreType
int
Default Value: 0
The type of certificate store for this certificate.
The class supports both public and private keys in a variety of formats. When the cstAuto value is used, the class will automatically determine the type. This field can take one of the following values:
0 (cstUser - default) | For Windows, this specifies that the certificate store is a certificate store owned by the current user.
Note: This store type is not available in Java. |
1 (cstMachine) | For Windows, this specifies that the certificate store is a machine store.
Note: This store type is not available in Java. |
2 (cstPFXFile) | The certificate store is the name of a PFX (PKCS#12) file containing certificates. |
3 (cstPFXBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in PFX (PKCS#12) format. |
4 (cstJKSFile) | The certificate store is the name of a Java Key Store (JKS) file containing certificates.
Note: This store type is only available in Java. |
5 (cstJKSBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in Java Key Store (JKS) format.
Note: This store type is only available in Java. |
6 (cstPEMKeyFile) | The certificate store is the name of a PEM-encoded file that contains a private key and an optional certificate. |
7 (cstPEMKeyBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains a private key and an optional certificate. |
8 (cstPublicKeyFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a PEM- or DER-encoded public key certificate. |
9 (cstPublicKeyBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains a PEM- or DER-encoded public key certificate. |
10 (cstSSHPublicKeyBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains an SSH-style public key. |
11 (cstP7BFile) | The certificate store is the name of a PKCS#7 file containing certificates. |
12 (cstP7BBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary) representing a certificate store in PKCS#7 format. |
13 (cstSSHPublicKeyFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains an SSH-style public key. |
14 (cstPPKFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a PPK (PuTTY Private Key). |
15 (cstPPKBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary) that contains a PPK (PuTTY Private Key). |
16 (cstXMLFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a certificate in XML format. |
17 (cstXMLBlob) | The certificate store is a string that contains a certificate in XML format. |
18 (cstJWKFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a JWK (JSON Web Key). |
19 (cstJWKBlob) | The certificate store is a string that contains a JWK (JSON Web Key). |
21 (cstBCFKSFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a BCFKS (Bouncy Castle FIPS Key Store).
Note: This store type is only available in Java and .NET. |
22 (cstBCFKSBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in BCFKS (Bouncy Castle FIPS Key Store) format.
Note: This store type is only available in Java and .NET. |
23 (cstPKCS11) | The certificate is present on a physical security key accessible via a PKCS#11 interface.
To use a security key, the necessary data must first be collected using the CertMgr class. The ListStoreCertificates method may be called after setting CertStoreType to cstPKCS11, CertStorePassword to the PIN, and CertStore to the full path of the PKCS#11 DLL. The certificate information returned in the CertList event's CertEncoded parameter may be saved for later use. When using a certificate, pass the previously saved security key information as the Store and set StorePassword to the PIN. Code Example. SSH Authentication with Security Key:
|
99 (cstAuto) | The store type is automatically detected from the input data. This setting may be used with both public and private keys and can detect any of the supported formats automatically. |
SubjectAltNames
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
Comma-separated lists of alternative subject names for the certificate.
ThumbprintMD5
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The MD5 hash of the certificate. It is primarily used for X.509 certificates. If the hash does not already exist, it is automatically computed.
ThumbprintSHA1
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The SHA-1 hash of the certificate. It is primarily used for X.509 certificates. If the hash does not already exist, it is automatically computed.
ThumbprintSHA256
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The SHA-256 hash of the certificate. It is primarily used for X.509 certificates. If the hash does not already exist, it is automatically computed.
Usage
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The text description of UsageFlags.
This value will be one or more of the following strings and will be separated by commas:
- Digital Signature
- Non-Repudiation
- Key Encipherment
- Data Encipherment
- Key Agreement
- Certificate Signing
- CRL Signing
- Encipher Only
If the provider is OpenSSL, the value is a comma-separated list of X.509 certificate extension names.
UsageFlags
int (read-only)
Default Value: 0
The flags that show intended use for the certificate. The value of UsageFlags is a combination of the following flags:
0x80 | Digital Signature |
0x40 | Non-Repudiation |
0x20 | Key Encipherment |
0x10 | Data Encipherment |
0x08 | Key Agreement |
0x04 | Certificate Signing |
0x02 | CRL Signing |
0x01 | Encipher Only |
Please see the Usage field for a text representation of UsageFlags.
This functionality currently is not available when the provider is OpenSSL.
Version
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The certificate's version number. The possible values are the strings "V1", "V2", and "V3".
Subject
char*
Default Value: ""
The subject of the certificate used for client authentication.
This property must be set after all other certificate properties are set. When this property is set, a search is performed in the current certificate store to locate a certificate with a matching subject.
If a matching certificate is found, the field is set to the full subject of the matching certificate.
If an exact match is not found, the store is searched for subjects containing the value of the property.
If a match is still not found, the property is set to an empty string, and no certificate is selected.
The special value "*" picks a random certificate in the certificate store.
The certificate subject is a comma-separated list of distinguished name fields and values. For instance, "CN=www.server.com, OU=test, C=US, E=example@email.com". Common fields and their meanings are as follows:
Field | Meaning |
CN | Common Name. This is commonly a hostname like www.server.com. |
O | Organization |
OU | Organizational Unit |
L | Locality |
S | State |
C | Country |
E | Email Address |
If a field value contains a comma, it must be quoted.
Encoded
char*
Default Value: ""
The certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded). This field is used to assign a specific certificate. The Store and Subject fields also may be used to specify a certificate.
When Encoded is set, a search is initiated in the current Store for the private key of the certificate. If the key is found, Subject is updated to reflect the full subject of the selected certificate; otherwise, Subject is set to an empty string.
Constructors
Certificate()
Creates a instance whose properties can be set. This is useful for use with when generating new certificates.
Certificate(const char* lpEncoded, int lenEncoded)
Parses Encoded as an X.509 public key.
Certificate(int iStoreType, const char* lpStore, int lenStore, const char* lpszStorePassword, const char* lpszSubject)
StoreType identifies the type of certificate store to use. See for descriptions of the different certificate stores. Store is a byte array containing the certificate data. StorePassword is the password used to protect the store.
After the store has been successfully opened, the component will attempt to find the certificate identified by Subject . This can be either a complete or a substring match of the X.509 certificate's subject Distinguished Name (DN). The Subject parameter can also take an MD5, SHA-1, or SHA-256 thumbprint of the certificate to load in a "Thumbprint=value" format.
FDMSRcBillPay Type
Contains bill payment information.
Syntax
DPaymentsSDKFDMSRcBillPay (declared in dpaymentssdk.h)
Remarks
This type contains information used in processing a bill payment.
- InstallmentDescription
- InstallmentInvoiceNumber
- InstallmentType
- MerchantAdviceCode
- MITAmount
- MITAmountType
- MITFrequency
- MITPaymentCurrency
- MITRecurringPaymentType
- MITRegistrationRefNum
- MITSequenceIndicator
- MITTotalPaymentAmount
- MITTotalPaymentCount
- MITUniqueID
- MITValidationFlag
- MITValidationRef
- TransactionIndicator
Fields
InstallmentDescription
char*
Default Value: ""
The merchant's description of an Installment Bill Payment Transaction.
This field is only sent in an 'Installment' or 'Recurring' transaction.
The maximum length of this field is 15 characters.
InstallmentInvoiceNumber
char*
Default Value: ""
The Invoice Number of an Installment Bill Payment Transaction.
This field is only sent in an 'Installment' or 'Recurring' transaction.
The maximum length of this field is 12 characters.
InstallmentType
int
Default Value: 0
The type of the Installment payment.
This field is required for all Discover, Diners (including JCB - US Domestic) Installment transactions TransactionIndicator value 3 (tiInstallment) and it is applicable to ECommerce, MOTO, and Retail transactions. Possible values are:
0 (itUnspecified - default) | Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request. |
1 (itMerchant) | Merchant - Merchant Installment Payment |
2 (itThirdParty) | ThirdParty - Third Party Installment Payment |
3 (itIssuer) | Issuer - Issuer Installment Payment |
MerchantAdviceCode
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
This field contains a code which may be returned by the issuer to provide additional information for a card not present transaction.
The following values are defined:
Response Code | Meaning |
01 | New account information available |
02 | Try again later (must wait 72 hours before sending the recurring transaction again) |
03 | Do not try again |
04 | Token requirements are not fulfilled for this token type |
05 | Card account closed or fraud |
06 | Cardholder canceled recurring payment |
07 | Cancel specific payment |
21 | Do not honor - Issuer has blocked recurring payment service / Payment Cancellation |
22 | Merchant does not qualify for product code |
24 | Retry after 1 hour |
25 | Retry after 24 hours |
26 | Retry after 2 days |
27 | Retry after 4 days |
28 | Retry after 6 days |
29 | Retry after 8 days |
30 | Retry after 10 days |
MITAmount
char*
Default Value: ""
The amount of the Recurring or Installment payment.
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa', 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.
The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.
MITAmountType
int
Default Value: 0
Identifies the type of the Recurring or Installment Payment amount.
The following values are defined:
0 (atUnspecified - default) | Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request. |
1 (atFixed) | Fixed - subscription (e.g. monthly newspaper subscription) |
2 (atVariable) | Variable - standing order (e.g. monthly utility payment) |
MITFrequency
int
Default Value: 0
This field indicates the frequency of a Recurring or Installment payment.
The following values are defined:
0 (freqUnspecified - default) | Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request. |
1 (freqDaily) | Daily |
2 (freqWeekly) | Weekly |
3 (freqBiweekly) | Biweekly / Fortnightly |
4 (freqMonthly) | Monthly |
5 (freqQuarterly) | Quarterly |
6 (freqBiannually) | Half-Yearly (Biannually) |
7 (freqAnnually) | Annually |
8 (freqUnscheduled) | Unscheduled (Type of MIT) |
9 (freqTenDays) | Ten days |
10 (freqTwiceWeekly) | Twice weekly |
11 (freqEveryTwoMonths) | Every two months |
12 (freqTrimester) | Trimester |
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa', 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.
When the Card Type is 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners', the valid values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8.
For Visa Recurring transactions, valid values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12.
For Visa Installment transactions, valid values are 2, 3, or 4.
MITPaymentCurrency
char*
Default Value: "840"
Contains the Installment Payment Currency represented as a 3 digit value.
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa'. For US Dollars, use "840".
MITRecurringPaymentType
int
Default Value: 0
This field contains the type of Recurring Payment.
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa'. The following values are defined:
0 (rptUnspecified - default) | Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request. |
1 (rptRegistration) | Registration / first transaction |
2 (rptSubsequent) | Subsequent transaction |
3 (rptModification) | Modification |
4 (rptCancellation) | Cancellation |
MITRegistrationRefNum
char*
Default Value: ""
This field contains a unique Reference Number for the Recurring Payment transaction.
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa'.
The maximum length of this field is 35 characters.
MITSequenceIndicator
int
Default Value: 0
Identifies the sequence of the transactions when multiple Installment payments will be submitted.
This field should be populated in ascending order and is only applicable when Card Type is 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.
Valid values for this field are numbers from 0 to 99.
MITTotalPaymentAmount
char*
Default Value: ""
This field contains the Total Installment Amount.
This field is only applicable for Visa Installment transactions. Note : The total amount cannot exceed USD 500,000.
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.
The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.
MITTotalPaymentCount
char*
Default Value: ""
The number of Recurring payments or Installments per the Cardholder agreement with the Merchant.
The following values are defined:
Value | Description |
01 to 99 | Installment Count |
UD | Not Defined |
UC | Until Canceled |
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa', 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'. For Discover, the valid values should be from 02 to 99, UD and UC. For Visa, the valid values should be from 01 to 99. Note: For Visa recurring payments, value of '99' means that recurring payments are authorized until canceled or that the Number of Recurring Payments is not defined.
When this field is sent for Visa or Discover (including JCB - US Domestic Only and Diners), the Bill Payment Transaction Indicator must be present with the value of 'Recurring' or 'Installment'. For Discover (including JCB - US Domestic Only and Diners) installment transactions, this field can only be sent when the Installment Type field contains the value of 'Merchant' or 'ThirdParty'. For Discover (including JCB - US Domestic Only and Diners) installment transactions, this field must be sent for ALL Installment transactions for a series of payments, and the original CIT transaction must be initiated with 3DS.
The maximum length of this field is 2 characters.
MITUniqueID
char*
Default Value: ""
This field is used to uniquely identify each of the Recurring or Installment Payment. This ID is used to reference authorization transactions.
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Discover', 'JCB' or 'Diners'.
The maximum length of this field is 14 characters.
MITValidationFlag
int
Default Value: 0
Indicates the validation source for the validity of a transaction.
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa', 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.
The following values are defined:
0 (vfUnspecified - default) | Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request. |
1 (vfValidated) | Validated Card Transaction |
2 (vfNotValidated) | Not Validated Card Transaction |
MITValidationRef
char*
Default Value: ""
This field contains a cryptogram generated by the validation source for each cardholder account, for an Issuer to validate a transaction.
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.
The maximum length of this field is 20 characters.
TransactionIndicator
int
Default Value: 0
Specifies the type of Bill Payment being made.
This field contains the type of bill payment being made. This is applicable to ECommerce, MOTO, and Retail transactions. Possible values are:
0 (tiUnspecified - default) | Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request. |
1 (tiSingleTransaction) | Single transaction |
2 (tiRecurring) | Recurring transaction |
3 (tiInstallment) | Installment transaction |
4 (tiDeferredBilling) | Deferred Billing transaction |
To settle an Installment transaction, you must use the FDMSRcDetailrecord class to add the number of this installment and the total count of all installments to be made. For instance, if the purchase was for "Three easy payments of $19.95", and this is the first payment, then the installment number will be 1, and the installment count 3. An example is included below:
FDMSRcECommerce.Config("BillPaymentType=3") // 3=Installment
FDMSRcECommerce.TransactionAmount = "1995"
FDMSRcECommerce.AuthOnly()
FDMSRcDetailRecord.ParseAggregate(FDMSRcECommerce.GetDetailAggregate())
FDMSRcDetailRecord.InstallmentCount = 3
FDMSRcDetailRecord.InstallmentNumber = 1
FDMSRcSettle.DetailRecordAggregate(5) = FDMSRcDetailRecord.GetDetailAggregate()
Constructors
FDMSRcBillPay()
FDMSRcLevel2 Type
Specifies Level 2 (purchasing card) information.
Syntax
DPaymentsSDKFDMSRcLevel2 (declared in dpaymentssdk.h)
Remarks
This type specifies Level 2 (purchasing card) information.
- CustomerReferenceNumber
- DestinationCountryCode
- DestinationPostalCode
- DiscountAmount
- DutyAmount
- FreightAmount
- MerchantTaxId
- ProductDescription
- PurchaseIdentifier
- ShipFromPostalCode
- TaxAmount
- TaxIndicator
Fields
CustomerReferenceNumber
char*
Default Value: ""
The reference number or order number to be reported as part of the Purchase Card data.
If TaxAmount is specified this field is required.
The value may be up to 17 characters in length.
DestinationCountryCode
char*
Default Value: ""
This field represents the country code of the location the items in this purchase are being delivered to.
This value is the ISO 3166 three digit numeric identifier.
DestinationPostalCode
char*
Default Value: ""
This field contains the postal or zip code of the location the item(s) in this purchase are being delivered to.
This field is required for American Express purchase card transactions. This is the same as the ShipFromPostalCode when the customer takes possession of the items at the merchant location.
The value may be up to 9 characters.
DiscountAmount
char*
Default Value: ""
This field contains the discount amount for the purchase.
This field is required for Visa, MasterCard, and American Express purchase card transactions when a discount has been applied.
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.
The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.
DutyAmount
char*
Default Value: ""
This field contains the duty amount for this purchase.
This field is required for Visa, MasterCard, and American Express purchase card transactions when a duty amount has been applied.
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.
The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.
FreightAmount
char*
Default Value: ""
This field contains the amount for freight included in this purchase.
This field is required for Visa, MasterCard, and American Express purchase card transactions when a freight amount has been applied.
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.
The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.
MerchantTaxId
char*
Default Value: ""
This field should contain the Tax Id collected by the merchant for this transaction.
This field is required for MasterCard purchase card transactions.
The value may be up to 15 characters in length.
ProductDescription
char*
Default Value: ""
This field should contain a description of an item purchased with this card.
This field is required for American Express purchase card transactions and not applicable to other card types.
The value may be up to 40 characters in length.
PurchaseIdentifier
char*
Default Value: ""
This field represents the data used by the merchant or customer to identify the purchase. This can be a SKU, code, or reference number.
This field is required for Visa, MasterCard, and American Express purchase card transactions.
The value may be up to 25 characters in length.
ShipFromPostalCode
char*
Default Value: ""
The postal or zip code the item(s) in this purchase are to be shipped from.
The value may be up to 9 characters.
TaxAmount
char*
Default Value: ""
This field contains the portion of the transaction amount that represents the tax.
This field is required when TaxIndicator is set to 2 (tiProvided).
For Visa this is the amount of state or provincial tax included in the TransactionAmount. The tax amount must be within 0.1 % and 22% of the pre-tax transaction amount.
For MasterCard the total amount of sales tax on the total purchase must be between 0.1% and 30 % of the total pre-tax transaction amount; zeros indicate that the card acceptor is capable of transmitting the tax amount and the tax amount is zero.
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.
The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.
TaxIndicator
int
Default Value: 0
This field indicates the taxable status of the transaction. Possible values are:
0 (tiUnSet - default) | UnSet - no value is sent in the request |
1 (tiNotProvided) | No tax information provided |
2 (tiProvided) | Tax amount is provided |
3 (tiExempt) | Purchase item is tax exempt or non-taxable |
Constructors
FDMSRcLevel2()
FDMSRcResponse Type
Contains the response to the authorization.
Syntax
DPaymentsSDKFDMSRcResponse (declared in dpaymentssdk.h)
Remarks
This type contains the results of a transaction made with the FDMSRcECommerce or FDMSRcRetail class. The fields contained by this type are listed below.
- ApprovalCode
- AuthorizedAmount
- AuthorizingNetworkId
- AuthorizingNetworkName
- AVSResult
- Balance
- CardLevelResult
- Code
- CommercialCard
- CVVResult
- DatawireReturnCode
- DatawireStatus
- EMVData
- POSData
- ReturnedACI
- RoutingIndicator
- SettlementDate
- Text
- TransactionDate
- TransactionId
Fields
ApprovalCode
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The Approval Code returned from the server after a successful authorization.
This value holds the approval code returned by the authorizer. This value will contain up to 8 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and spaces will be returned.
AuthorizedAmount
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The amount actually charged to the card.
This value holds the amount charged to the card. In the case of a partial authorization this will be different than the amount specified in TransactionAmount.
You must collect the remainder via another form of payment, or Reverse the authorization if the customer does not have an additional form of payment.
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.
The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.
AuthorizingNetworkId
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
This field indicates the network Id as returned by the host, if available.
This value is up to 3 alphanumeric characters.
AuthorizingNetworkName
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
This field indicates the authorizing network name as returned by the host, when available.
AVSResult
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
Contains the Address Verification System result code.
This one character field contains the Address Verification System (AVS) result code. This field is populated if a value is present in the response. An AVS result code can provide additional information concerning the authentication of a particular transaction for which cardholder address verification was requested. Possible AVS codes are listed in the table below.
Visa Card AVS Codes
Code | Description |
A | Street address matches, postal code does not match |
B | Street addresses match; postal code not verified due to incompatible formats |
C | Street address and postal code not verified |
D | Street address and postal code match (International only) |
F | Street address and postal code match (UK) |
G | Address information not verified for international transaction. Issuer is not an AVS Participant, or, AVS data was present in the request but the issuer did not return an AVS result, or no address on file (International only) |
I | Address verification service not performed (International only) |
M | Street address and postal codes match (International only) |
N | No match; neither the street addresses nor the postal codes match |
P | Postal code matches; street address not verified |
R | Retry, system unavailable to process |
S | Service not supported |
U | Address information is unavailable |
Y | Both postal code and address match |
Z | Postal code matches, Street address does not match or Street address not included in request |
MasterCard AVS Codes
A | Street address matches, postal code does not match |
E | Error: Transaction ineligible for address verification or edit error found in the message that prevents AVS from being performed |
N | No match; neither the street addresses nor the postal codes match |
R | Retry, system unavailable to process |
S | Service not supported |
U | Address information is unavailable |
W | U.S. - Street Address does not match, nine digit postal code matches; For address outside the U.S., postal code matches, address does not |
X | Exact: U.S. - Address and 9-digit postal code match; For address outside the U.S., postal code matches, address does not |
Y | Yes: Address and 5-digit postal code match for US address |
Z | Five digit postal code matches, address does not match |
Amex AVS Codes
A | Street address matches, postal code does not match |
N | No match; neither the street addresses nor the postal code matches |
R | Retry, system unavailable to process |
S | Service not supported |
U | Address information is unavailable |
Y | Both postal code and address match |
Z | Nine or five digit postal code matches, address does not match |
L | Card member Name and Billing Postal Code match |
M | Card member Name, Billing Address and Postal Code match |
O | Card member Name and Billing Address match |
K | Card member Name matches |
D | Card member Name incorrect, Billing Postal Code matches |
E | Card member Name incorrect, Billing Address and Postal Code match |
F | Card member Name incorrect, Billing Address matches |
W | No, Card member Name, Billing Address and Postal Code are all incorrect |
Discover or JCB
A | Both address and five digit postal code match |
G | Address information not verified for international transaction |
N | No match; neither the street addresses nor the postal code matches |
R | Retry, system unable to process |
S | Service not supported |
T | No data received from Issuer |
W | Nine digit postal code matches, address does not match |
X | All digits match (nine digit zip code) |
Y | Street address matches, postal code does not match |
Z | Five digit postal code matches, address does not match |
Balance
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
Contains the remaining available balance left on the card.
This balance amount will only be returned for prepaid cards.
CardLevelResult
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
This field is only applicable to Visa card. This field holds a two character value returned by Visa to designate the type of card product used to process the transaction.
Code
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
Contains the 3 digit response code indicating success or reason of failure.
This field contains a 3 digit code indicating success or the reason of failure. A value of 000 indicates approval. For all other values please see the Response Codes section.
CommercialCard
int (read-only)
Default Value: 0
Indicates whether the credit card charged is a corporate commercial card.
This is only applicable to Visa cards. Visa Business, corporate, and purchasing cards are subsets of commercial cards. Therefore, the user should send Level 2 (and possibly Level 3) data when calling Capture when this property indicates a commercial card was used. The following table indicates the type of commercial card:
fccNotCommercial (0) | Card presented for authorization is not a commercial card |
fccPurchaseCard (1) | Card presented for authorization is a Visa Purchasing Card. |
fccCorporateCard (2) | Card presented for authorization is a Visa Corporate Card. |
fccBusinessCard (3) | Card presented for authorization is a Visa Business Card. |
fccUnknown (4) | Unable to obtain information from processor. |
Note: Tax amounts should be included with the Level2 or Level3 data when calling Capture in order to receive the best interchange rate.
CVVResult
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
Contains the returned CVV result code (if CVV data was sent in the request).
If a CVV value was sent in the authorization, this field will contain the host returned Card Verification Value result code. This field is populated if a value is present in the response. The following is a list of current result codes:
Match | Values match |
NoMtch | Values do not match |
NotPrc | Not processed |
NotPrv | Value not provided |
NotPrt | Issuer not participating |
Unknwn | Unknown |
DatawireReturnCode
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
Contains an error code providing more details about the DatawireStatus received.
When a transaction is successfully passed from the application, through the Datawire system to the FDMS payment processor and back, the DatawireStatus will be "OK" and the DatawireReturnCode will be "000". These two fields have NO BEARING on the actual results of any transaction. Even though the transaction has successfully passed through the Datawire system, it can still fail to be processed successfully by FDMS. This field only indicates that the request reached FDMS, and that FDMS responded with some data.
The ApprovalCode contains the actual transaction result that was returned by FDMS.
The following is a list of possible Datawire return codes:
000 | Transaction successfully passed through the Datawire system to the FDMS Payment Processor and back. |
200 | Host Busy - The processor's Host is busy and is currently unable to service this request. |
201 | Host Unavailable - The processor's Host is currently unavailable. For example, the server is sending NAK. |
202 | Host Connect Error - Could not connect to the processor's Host. |
203 | Host Drop - The processor's Host disconnected during the transaction before sending a response. |
204 | Host Comm Error - An error was encountered while communicating with the processor's Host. |
205 | No Response - No response from the processor's Host |
206 | Host Send Error - An error has encountered when sending the request to the processor, and the Host daemon cannot continue sending packets to the processor because the connection is broken. |
405 | Vxn Timeout - The request could not be processed. |
505 | Network Error - The request could not be processed. |
DatawireStatus
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
Status of the communication with Datawire.
When a transaction is successfully passed from the application, through the Datawire system to the FDMS payment processor and back, the DatawireStatus will be "OK" and the DatawireReturnCode will be "000". These two fields have NO BEARING on the actual results of any transaction. Even though the transaction has successfully passed through the Datawire system, it can still fail to be processed successfully by FDMS. This field only indicates that the request reached FDMS, and that FDMS responded with some data.
The ApprovalCode contains the actual FDMS Transaction Result that was returned.
The following is a list of possible Datawire response status codes:
OK | Transaction has successfully passed through the Datawire system to the FDMS Payment processor and back. |
AuthenticationError | DatawireId in the request was not successfully authenticated. |
UnknownServiceID | ServiceId part of the URL (in the Service Discovery or Ping request) is unknown. |
WrongSessionContext | The SessionContext element of the Session Transaction request does not match the SessionContext returned by the InitiateSession response (applicable to the FDMSSettle class). |
AccessDenied | Generally, occurs when you try to register a merchant after a merchant has already been activated to use the Datawire VXN. |
Failed | Your Merchant Registration has failed. Contact tech.support@datawire.net for more information. |
Retry | Registration is not yet complete. You must send the Registration request again. |
Timeout | No response from the Service Provider was received during the expected period of time. |
XMLError | Request contains some XML error, such as malformed XML, violation of this DTD, etc. |
OtherError | Unspecified error occurred. |
008 | Network Error |
EMVData
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
Contains the EMV data returns in the response (if any).
This field is only applicable to Retail and Debit transactions.
POSData
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
This field holds transaction specific information returned by the issuer (if any). This is only applicable to MasterCard, Discover, and AmEx card transactions.
ReturnedACI
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
Returned Authorization Characteristics Indicator contains CPS qualification status.
This one character field contains the returned Authorization Characteristics Indicator (ACI) for Visa transactions. This value provides information concerning the transaction's Customer Payment Service (CPS) qualification status. It is not recommended that the Point of Sale (POS) system attempt to interpret the meaning of this value.
Possible returned ACI values are:
Value | Description |
A | Card Present |
B | Tokenized Ecommerce via mobile device (Payment Token) |
C | Card present with merchant name and location data (cardholder activated) |
E | Card present with merchant name and location data |
F | Card not present, Account Funding |
I | Incremental Authorization |
J | Card not present Recurring bill payment transaction |
K | Key Entered Transaction (error while reading magnetic stripe data) |
N | Not a custom payment service transaction |
P | Card-not-present (preferred customer participation) |
R | Card-not-present, AVS not required |
S | Card not present, e-commerce 3-D secure attempt |
T | Transaction cannot participate in CPS programs |
U | Card not present, 3-D secure |
V | Card-not-present, AVS requested |
W | Card not present, e-commerce non-3-D secure |
RoutingIndicator
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
Indicates whether the transaction was processed as Credit or Debit. Possible values are:
Value | Meaning |
C | Credit |
D | Debit |
SettlementDate
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The date the transaction will be settled in the format MMDD.
Text
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
This field may hold additional text which describes the reason for a decline, the field in error, etc. Applications should not be coded to the text in this field as it is subject to change.
TransactionDate
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
The transaction date returned from the server in yyyyMMddHHmmss format.
This 15 digit field contains the transaction date and time returned by the Rapid Connect system. This is not a local datetime, it is the time according the Rapid Connect system.
TransactionId
char* (read-only)
Default Value: ""
Card issuer's Transaction Reference Number.
This field contains a Visa Transaction Id, MasterCard BankNet data, American Express Transaction Id, or Discover Network Result Indicator (NRID). If returned in the response, this field should be printed on the receipt.
Constructors
FDMSRcResponse()
Proxy Type
The proxy the component will connect to.
Syntax
DPaymentsSDKProxy (declared in dpaymentssdk.h)
Remarks
When connecting through a proxy, this type is used to specify different properties of the proxy, such as the Server and the AuthScheme.
Fields
AuthScheme
int
Default Value: 0
The type of authorization to perform when connecting to the proxy. This is used only when the User and Password fields are set.
AuthScheme should be set to authNone (3) when no authentication is expected.
By default, AuthScheme is authBasic (0), and if the User and Password fields are set, the class will attempt basic authentication.
If AuthScheme is set to authDigest (1), digest authentication will be attempted instead.
If AuthScheme is set to authProprietary (2), then the authorization token will not be generated by the class. Look at the configuration file for the class being used to find more information about manually setting this token.
If AuthScheme is set to authNtlm (4), NTLM authentication will be used.
For security reasons, setting this field will clear the values of User and Password.
AutoDetect
int
Default Value: FALSE
Whether to automatically detect and use proxy system settings, if available. The default value is false.
Password
char*
Default Value: ""
A password if authentication is to be used for the proxy.
If AuthScheme is set to Basic Authentication, the User and Password fields are Base64 encoded and the proxy authentication token will be generated in the form Basic [encoded-user-password].
If AuthScheme is set to Digest Authentication, the User and Password fields are used to respond to the Digest Authentication challenge from the server.
If AuthScheme is set to NTLM Authentication, the User and Password fields are used to authenticate through NTLM negotiation.
Port
int
Default Value: 80
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) port for the proxy Server (default 80). See the description of the Server field for details.
Server
char*
Default Value: ""
If a proxy Server is given, then the HTTP request is sent to the proxy instead of the server otherwise specified.
If the Server field is set to a domain name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the Server field is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.
SSL
int
Default Value: 0
When to use a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) for the connection to the proxy. The applicable values are as follows:
psAutomatic (0) | Default setting. If the URL is an https URL, the class will use the psTunnel option. If the URL is an http URL, the class will use the psNever option. |
psAlways (1) | The connection is always SSL-enabled. |
psNever (2) | The connection is not SSL-enabled. |
psTunnel (3) | The connection is made through a tunneling (HTTP) proxy. |
User
char*
Default Value: ""
A username if authentication is to be used for the proxy.
If AuthScheme is set to Basic Authentication, the User and Password fields are Base64 encoded and the proxy authentication token will be generated in the form Basic [encoded-user-password].
If AuthScheme is set to Digest Authentication, the User and Password fields are used to respond to the Digest Authentication challenge from the server.
If AuthScheme is set to NTLM Authentication, the User and Password fields are used to authenticate through NTLM negotiation.
Constructors
Proxy()
Proxy(const char* lpszServer, int iPort)
Proxy(const char* lpszServer, int iPort, const char* lpszUser, const char* lpszPassword)
Config Settings (FDMSRcRetail Class)
The class accepts one or more of the following configuration settings. Configuration settings are similar in functionality to properties, but they are rarely used. In order to avoid "polluting" the property namespace of the class, access to these internal properties is provided through the Config method.FDMSRcRetail Config Settings
A mandatory code used for qualification in the Visa Custom Payment Service (CPS) program, MasterCard Preferred Rate program, or to identify an Incremental transaction. The following table provides a summary of the codes currently supported by Visa, MasterCard, and Discover.
Value | Visa | Mastercard | Discover | |
P | X | X | Preferred Rate/Customer Status (Lodging or Auto Rental) | |
I | X | X | X | Incremental Authorization |
Y (Default) | X | Transaction requests participation | ||
R | X | Card-not-present, AVS not required (permitted for certain MCCs only) |
This setting specifies whether partial authorizations are supported. Partial authorization support is generally required for all merchants in card-present environments. The merchant may be subject to fees, interchange downgrades, or both if this is not supported in a retail environment. Support for partial authorizations is optional in ECommerce transactions but is highly recommended. The default value is True.
This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant address to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 25 characters in length.
This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant city to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 20 characters in length.
This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant country code to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value is the ISO 3166 three digit numeric identifier.
This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant email address be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 40 characters in length.
This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant name to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 30 characters in length.
This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant state to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value is the two characters state abbreviation.
This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant zip code to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 9 characters in length.
Possible values are:
1 | Re-authorization (Visa and Discover only) |
2 | Resubmission (Visa and Discover only) |
3 | Estimated Authorization (Visa only) |
4 | Credential on File (Visa, Discover, Amex, and Mastercard only) |
This setting indicates whether the authorized amount is equal to the final captured amount. This is a mandatory MasterCard only field. The list of valid values is:
0 | Preauthorization - The Settlement amount may be different than the amount authorized. |
1 | Final Authorization -The settlement amount must equal the approved authorized amount. |
Note: When this field is set to '1' in the original transaction, you cannot send a Partial Reversal subsequent transaction. Set the AuthorizationIndicator to '0' when the settlement amount may be different than the approved amount authorized.
This setting may be queried after a transaction to determine the source of the decision. This is only applicable to Visa transactions. Possible values are:
0 | Timeout - Response Provided by STIP, Timed Out by Switch |
1 | Visa Stand-In Processing - Response Provided by STIP, Transaction Amount was Below Issuer Limit or Below Sliding Dollar Amount |
2 | Suppress Inquiry Mode - Response Provided by STIP, Issuer is in Suppress Inquiry (SI) Mode |
3 | Issuer Unavailable - Response Provided by STIP for One of the Following Reasons: Issuer was Not Available for Processing (for reasons other than being in SI Mode) or CCV or iCCV was Invalid and Visa has Acted on the Negative Results |
4 | Issuer - Response Provided by Issuer |
This setting optionally specifies the method used to input the card number or track data. If not specified (default) the class will automatically determine the correct value based on EntryDataSource. This should only be set if there is a need to override the automatically determined value. Possible values are:
00 | Unspecified |
01 | Manual (Key entered) |
03 | Barcode |
04 | OCR (Optical Character Reader) |
05 | Integrated Circuit Read (CVV data Reliable) |
07 | Contactless Integrated Circuit Read (Reliable) |
08 | AMEX Digital Wallet |
09 | MasterCard remote chip entry |
10 | Credential on File |
79 | EMV fallback to manual entry |
80 | EMV fallback to Magnetic Stripe entry |
82 | Contactless Mobile Commerce |
86 | EMV Transaction switched from Contactless to Contact entry |
90 | Magnetic Stripe - Track Read |
91 | Contactless Magnetic Stripe Read |
95 | Integrated Circuit Read (CVV data unreliable) |
By default the class will automatically determine the card type and submit the card type information in the transaction request. This setting may be set to override the automatically determined value and manually specify the type of card.
This should not be set unless there is a specific reason to do so.
Possible values are:
0 | Invalid or unknown prefix, card type not known |
1 | Visa |
2 | MasterCard |
3 | American Express |
4 | Discover |
5 | Diners |
6 | JCB |
7 | Visa Electron |
8 | Maestro |
9 | China Union Pay |
This 4-character field indicates whether the transaction was initiated by the Cardholder or the Merchant as well as providing more detail as to the type of stored credential being used for the transaction (Mastercard only).
Valid values are:
Customer Initiated Transaction (CIT)
Value | Description |
C101 | Credential on File |
C102 | Standing Order (variable amount, fixed frequency) |
C103 | Subscription (fixed amount and fixed frequency) |
C104 | Installment |
Merchant Initiated Transaction (MIT)
Value | Description |
M101 | Unscheduled Credential on File |
M102 | Standing Order (variable amount, fixed frequency) |
M103 | Subscription (fixed amount and fixed frequency) |
M104 | Installment |
Merchant Initiated Transaction (MIT) - Industry Practice
Value | Description |
M205 | Partial Shipment |
M206 | Related/Delayed Charge |
M207 | No show Charge |
M208 | Resubmission |
This setting indicates the interval of time, in seconds, a client will wait for the response for any given request. Normally this value is set to a value 5 seconds less than the Timeout value to allow for a response to be received from Datawire. It may be changed independently by setting this configuration setting AFTER setting the Timeout property. Note that too small a value will cause Datawire to reject a transaction immediately.
This field contains a three digit number assigned by the signing member or processor to identify the merchant's authorization currency. For US Dollars, use "840".
If set to True the Status event will fire with the raw request and response information. This is helpful for debugging.
This setting is required for contactless MasterCard transactions when CardInputMode is set to 07, 82, or 91. Possible values are:
0 | Card |
1 | Mobile Network Operator (MNO) controlled removable secure element (SIM or UICC) personalized for use with a Mobile Phone or Smartphone |
2 | Key Fob |
3 | Watch |
4 | Mobile Tag |
5 | Wristband |
6 | Mobile Phone Case or Sleeve |
7 | Mobile Phone or Smartphone with a fixed (non-removable) secure element controlled by the MNO, for example, code division multiple accesses (CDMA). |
8 | Removable secure element not controlled by the MNO, for example, memory card personalized for use with a Mobile Phone or Smartphone. |
9 | Mobile Phone or Smartphone with a fixed (non- removable) secure element not controlled by the MNO. |
10 | MNO controlled removable secure element (SIM or UICC) personalized for use with a Tablet or E-Book reader. |
11 | Tablet or E-Book reader with a fixed (non- removable) secure element controlled by the MNO. |
12 | Removable secure element not controlled by the MNO, for example, (SD Card) personalized for use with a Tablet or E- Book reader. |
13 | Tablet or E-Book with fixed (non- removable) secure element not controlled by the MNO |
The number of days the guest stayed in the hotel, or the expected duration of stay when authorizing a reservation. This field must be between 1 and 99 days. Default value is 1.
This setting specifies the security level of the ECommerce transaction. In most cases this does not need to be changed. A common reason for modifying this value is when supplying 3-D secure values. Possible values are:
01 | Merchant is 3-D Secure capable and the cardholder information is fully authenticated. |
02 | Merchant is 3-D Secure capable but the cardholder was not authenticated. Use this value when authentication was attempted but the issuer is not participating in 3-D Secure, the cardholder is not participating in 3-D Secure, or the authentication server was not available. |
03 | 3-D Secure was not attempted. |
This field is used along with EMVOnlinePIN to perform EMV online PIN transactions. The value of this property must be retrieved from a certified PIN pad device. This property is only valid for Card Present transactions. The maximum length is 20 characters.
This field is used along with EMVOnlineKSN to perform EMV online PIN transactions. The value of this property must be retrieved from a certified PIN pad device. This property is only valid for Card Present transactions. The maximum length is 16 characters.
This property contains a six-character numeric value used to identify any additional ancillary charges that are booked to the cardholder's card after the transaction was completed. The merchant may enter one or more codes on each transaction being settled. If extra charges are being submitted, this field must contain value(s) as defined below.
Value | Hotel Definition |
0 | None. |
2 | Restaurant. |
3 | Gift Shop. |
4 | Mini Bar. |
5 | Telephone. |
6 | Other. |
7 | Laundry. |
For example, to indicate charges in both the gift shop and mini bar, ExtraCharges should equal "34".
This field is only applicable to Visa card transactions when IndustryType is Hotel and will not be sent for any other industry types.
This is a 12 alphanumeric code assigned by the hotel during the transaction.
This setting allows you to retrieve a TransArmorToken for a specified card. Upon a successful call, both TransArmorToken and TransArmorProviderId will be populated with the values assigned to you by FDMS. In particular, this method is used when performing a Credit or Force using a TransArmorMode of '0' (Tokenization Only) or '1' (Encryption and Tokenization). So prior to adding the needed detail record to the FDMSSettle component, you will first retrieve a TransArmorToken by calling GetTransArmorToken for the card that you wish to use. The received TransArmorToken and TransArmorProviderId will then be set within the detail record (instead of the card data) and can be added to the FDMSSettle component.
This setting specifies the merchant password required in Host Totals requests.
This setting specifies the type of Host Totals Report requested. Possible values are:
0 (default) | Close Batch Report |
1 | Previous Day Report |
This setting indicates whether the stored credential transaction was scheduled. This field is mandatory if the AuthIndicator config is set to "4" (Credential on File).
Possible values are:
True | Scheduled |
False | Unscheduled |
This setting indicates an authorization transaction which occurs when a merchant captures transaction information while the connectivity is interrupted or unavailable. This indicator is sent in the authorization transaction once the connection is back online.
Note: This field has limited platform availability. For more information, please contact your Account Representative.
The default value is False
Set this config to True when sending an online purchase return authorization request.
This setting may be set to specify the local datetime of the transaction. By default the class will automatically calculate this value from the local system time. If set, this setting overrides the value calculated by the class. The format is "yyyyMMddHHmmss";
This is a 9 character identifier assigned by the hotel/lodging for the transaction.
This setting optionally specifies the industry standard 4 digit Merchant Category Code (MCC). This classifies the business based on the type of goods or services it provides.
This config is used when sending Merchant Initiated transactions. It should be set with the TransactionId from the original (first) Credential on File authorization. This configuration setting is required when sending a Subsequent Unscheduled Credential on File Merchant Initiated transaction, like in the example below:
class.Config("StoredCredentialIndicator=S"); // S - Subsequent
class.Config("IsCOFScheduled=False"); // Unscheduled
class.Config("AuthIndicator=4"); // Credential on File
class.Config("TransactionInitiation=1"); // Merchant initiated
class.Config("MITTransactionId=" + transId); // TransactionId saved from the Response of the initial COF transaction
class.AuthOnly();
This setting is required for Amex transactions when POSConditionCode is set to 08. Possible values are:
1 | Mail Order |
2 | Telephone Order |
This setting may be set to specify a different POS condition code. The class will automatically set this to an appropriate value, however this may be set to provide a specific value. Possible values are:
00 | Cardholder Present, Card Present |
01 | Cardholder Present, Unspecified |
02 | Cardholder Present, Unattended Device |
03 | Cardholder Present, Suspect Fraud |
04 | Cardholder Not Present - Recurring |
05 | Cardholder Present, Card Not Present |
06 | Cardholder Present, Identity Verified |
08 | Cardholder Not Present, Mail Order/Telephone Order |
59 | Cardholder Not Present, Ecommerce |
71 | Cardholder Present, Magnetic Stripe Could Not Be Read |
This may optionally be set to identify the specific point of sale device, for instance a lane number. This may be up to 4 digits in length. This setting is only applicable when IndustryType is set to Retail.
This is used to specify the program indicator for a hotel/lodging transaction. This property is not applicable for Mastercards.
Valid Values:
Value | Description |
1 (Default) | Normal Charge (Visa, Amex) |
2 | Assured Reservation No Show (Visa, Amex, Discover) |
3 | Card Deposit (Visa, Amex) |
4 | Delayed Charge (Visa, Amex, Discover) |
5 | Express Service (Visa, Amex) |
6 | Assured Reservation (Visa, Amex) |
This is a 6 character room number code assigned by the hotel during the transaction.
This field contains the daily rate for one room at the hotel/lodging property.
This configuration setting indicates the usage of stored credentials. Possible values are:
I | Initial |
S | Subsequent |
Note: This field is mandatory in a transaction where AuthIndicator value is "4" (Credential on File).
This field must be present with the value of "S" (Subsequent) when the CardInputMode config value is "10" (Credential on File).
This configuration setting, when set to 'True', will send the PINLess POS Debit Flag indicator in Authorizations, Sales and Refunds in a card-present environment. The field returned in the response message indicates whether the transaction was processed as a credit or debit. Default value is 'False'.
This configuration setting is for informational purposes only and any surcharge amounts charged to the customer should be included in the TransactionAmount.
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.
The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.
This setting specifies the terminal's ability to capture card information. Possible values are:
0 | Terminal has no capture capability or no terminal used |
1 | Terminal has card capture capability |
Note: If set to 0 track data must not be specified.
This settings defines what entry modes are supported by the terminal. Possible values are:
00 | Unspecified |
01 | Terminal not used |
02 | Magnetic stripe only |
03 | Magnetic stripe and key entry |
04 | Magnetic stripe, key entry, and chip |
05 | Bar code |
06 | Proximity terminal - contactless chip / RFID |
07 | OCR |
08 | Chip only |
09 | Chip and magnetic stripe |
10 | Manual entry only |
11 | Proximity terminal - contactless magnetic stripe |
12 | Hybrid - Magnetic stripe, Integrated Circuit Card Reader, and contactless capabilities |
13 | Terminal does not read card data |
Note: A value of 04, 06, 08, 09, or 12 cannot be specified unless the client is certified and the device is enabled for EMV.
This setting specifies the terminal's location. The class will automatically set this to the appropriate value depending on the IndustryType, however this may be set according to your needs to one of the following possible values:
0 | On Premises; Used in a Card Present environment |
1 | Off Premises; Used in a Card not Present environment |
Note: For MOTO and eCommerce transactions the value is set to 1 by default.
This setting specifies the terminal's ability to accept PIN entry. Possible values are:
0 | Unspecified |
1 | PIN entry capability |
2 | No PIN entry capability |
3 | PIN Pad Inoperative |
4 | PIN verified by terminal device |
This setting specifies the terminal's ability to prompt for tax when performing a transaction with Level 2 commercial cards. Possible values are:
0 | Terminal is not tax prompt capable |
1 | Terminal is tax prompt capable |
This setting specifies the total transaction amount that was authorized including Incremental Authorizations and Partial Reversals.
Possible values are:
1 | Transaction initiated by Merchant |
2 | Transaction initiated by Terminal |
3 | Transaction initiated by Customer |
Note: This field is mandatory in a transaction where AuthIndicator value is "4" (Credential on File) or ACI value is "I" (Incremental Authorization).
This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the key used to perform the encryption of the Card data. When a successful call to UpdateTransArmorKey is made, this setting will be populated with your assigned key. Store this key for future use. This setting is required for any transactions that you perform using TransArmor encryption (TransArmorMode = 1).
This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the Id of the TransArmorKey used to perform the encryption of the Card data. When a successful call to UpdateTransArmorKey is made, this setting will be populated with your assigned key ID. Store this key Id for future use. This setting is required for any transactions that you perform using TransArmor encryption (TransArmorMode = 1).
This setting allows you to specify the type of TransArmor security to be used when authorizing and settling transactions. The available modes are:
0 (default) | TransArmor security is not used. |
1 | TransArmor Encryption and Tokenization. The Card data will be encrypted using the specified TransArmorKey in the initial authorization. All subsequent requests (including settlement) will use the returned TransArmorToken. The type of encryption used is RSA and is currently the only supported encryption type. |
2 | TransArmor Tokenization only. The Card data will not be encrypted. A TransArmorToken will be returned for the transaction and will be used in all subsequent requests (including settlement). |
Note: Your merchant account must be configured to use TransArmor. The configuration is 'Mode' specific and thus you must inform FDMS which type of TransArmor Security Level you wish to use.
This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the Provider Id returned in an authorization response when using TransArmor (TransArmorMode = 1 OR 2). When an authorization is performed using TransArmor, a Provider Id will be returned in the response along with a TransArmorToken. This Provider Id will be used in all subsequent requests (such as reversals and settlement) and must be specified along with TransArmorToken.
This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the Token returned in an authorization response when using TransArmor (TransArmorMode = 1 OR 2). When an authorization is performed using TransArmor, a Token will be returned in the response. This Token will be used in all subsequent requests (such as reversals and settlement) in place of the Number or MagneticStripe.
This setting must be set to 4 digit the FDMS assigned token type. This is required when requesting a token. Specifies the type of TransArmor token that will be used.
This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the type of TransArmor token used.
This setting must be set to 4 digit the FDMS assigned token type. This is required when requesting a token. Specifies the type of TransArmor token that will be used.
This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the type of TransArmor token used.
This setting allows you to identify whether your TransArmorKey needs to be updated. When performing an authorization using TransArmor, it is possible that FDMS will request that you update your TransArmorKey. This setting should be queried after every authorization is performed. If the returned value is "False", no key update is required. If "True" is returned, you should update your key by calling UpdateTransArmorKey after the completion of the function in progress (i.e. authorization). If the key update request was successful, you should update your TransArmorKey and TransArmorKeyId values. If the key update request fails, you can continue using your same TransArmorKey and TransArmorKeyId values until another key update indicator is received.
This setting allows you to retrieve a TransArmorKey that will be used to perform TransArmor encryption (TransArmorMode = 1). When this is set to "true" the class will perform the request immediately. Upon a successful call, both TransArmorKey and TransArmorKeyId will be populated with the values assigned to you by FDMS.
This setting may be set to specify the UTC datetime of the transaction. By default the class will automatically calculate this value from the local system time. If set, this setting overrides the value calculated by the class. The format is "yyyyMMddHHmmss";
This configuration setting, when set to 'True' indicates that the transaction is a Visa Checkout transaction. Default value is 'False'.
This setting specifies the voice approval code obtained when authenticating the transaction over the phone with the issuer. Set this before calling Capture.
HTTP Config Settings
When AllowHTTPCompression is True, the class adds an Accept-Encoding header to the request being sent to the server. By default, this header's value is "gzip, deflate". This configuration setting allows you to change the value of the Accept-Encoding header. Note: The class only supports gzip and deflate decompression algorithms.
This configuration setting enables HTTP compression for receiving data. When set to True (default), the class will accept compressed data. It then will uncompress the data it has received. The class will handle data compressed by both gzip and deflate compression algorithms.
When True, the class adds an Accept-Encoding header to the outgoing request. The value for this header can be controlled by the AcceptEncoding configuration setting. The default value for this header is "gzip, deflate".
The default value is True.
This configuration setting controls whether HTTP/2 connections are permitted to fall back to HTTP/1.1 when the server does not support HTTP/2. This setting is applicable only when HTTPVersion is set to "2.0".
If set to True (default), the class will automatically use HTTP/1.1 if the server does not support HTTP/2. If set to False, the class fails with an error if the server does not support HTTP/2.
The default value is True.
This configuration setting determines whether data will be appended when writing to LocalFile. When set to True, downloaded data will be appended to LocalFile. This may be used in conjunction with Range to resume a failed download. This is applicable only when LocalFile is set. The default value is False.
If the Authorization property contains a nonempty string, an Authorization HTTP request header is added to the request. This header conveys Authorization information to the server.
This property is provided so that the HTTP class can be extended with other security schemes in addition to the authorization schemes already implemented by the class.
The AuthScheme property defines the authentication scheme used. In the case of HTTP Basic Authentication (default), every time User and Password are set, they are Base64 encoded, and the result is put in the Authorization property in the form "Basic [encoded-user-password]".
This configuration setting returns the raw number of bytes from the HTTP response data, before the component processes the data, whether it is chunked or compressed. This returns the same value as the Transfer event, by BytesTransferred.
This is applicable only when UseChunkedEncoding is True. This setting specifies the chunk size in bytes to be used when posting data. The default value is 16384.
If set to True, the body of a PUT or POST request will be compressed into gzip format before sending the request. The "Content-Encoding" header is also added to the outgoing request.
The default value is False.
If set to True, the URL passed to the class will be URL encoded. The default value is False.
This option determines what happens when the server issues a redirect. Normally, the class returns an error if the server responds with an "Object Moved" message. If this property is set to 1 (always), the new URL for the object is retrieved automatically every time.
If this property is set to 2 (Same Scheme), the new URL is retrieved automatically only if the URL Scheme is the same; otherwise, the class fails with an error.
Note: Following the HTTP specification, unless this option is set to 1 (Always), automatic redirects will be performed only for GET or HEAD requests. Other methods potentially could change the conditions of the initial request and create security vulnerabilities.
Furthermore, if either the new URL server or port are different from the existing one, User and Password are also reset to empty, unless this property is set to 1 (Always), in which case the same credentials are used to connect to the new server.
A Redirect event is fired for every URL the product is redirected to. In the case of automatic redirections, the Redirect event is a good place to set properties related to the new connection (e.g., new authentication parameters).
The default value is 0 (Never). In this case, redirects are never followed, and the class fails with an error instead.
Following are the valid options:
- 0 - Never
- 1 - Always
- 2 - Same Scheme
The default value is False. If set to True, the class will perform a GET on the new location. Otherwise, it will use the same HTTP method again.
HTTP/2 servers maintain a dynamic table of headers and values seen over the course of a connection. Typically, these headers are inserted into the table through incremental indexing (also known as HPACK, defined in RFC 7541). To tell the component not to use incremental indexing for certain headers, and thus not update the dynamic table, set this configuration option to a comma-delimited list of the header names.
This property specifies the HTTP version used by the class. Possible values are as follows:
- "1.0"
- "1.1" (default)
- "2.0"
- "3.0"
When using HTTP/2 ("2.0") or HTTP/3 ("3.0"), additional restrictions apply. Please see the following notes for details.
HTTP/2 Notes
When using HTTP/2, a secure Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security (TLS/SSL) connection is required. Attempting to use a plaintext URL with HTTP/2 will result in an error.
If the server does not support HTTP/2, the class will automatically use HTTP/1.1 instead. This is done to provide compatibility without the need for any additional settings. To see which version was used, check NegotiatedHTTPVersion after calling a method. The AllowHTTPFallback setting controls whether this behavior is allowed (default) or disallowed.
HTTP/3 Notes
HTTP/3 is supported only in .NET and Java.
When using HTTP/3, a secure (TLS/SSL) connection is required. Attempting to use a plaintext URL with HTTP/3 will result in an error.
If this setting contains a nonempty string, an If-Modified-Since HTTP header is added to the request. The value of this header is used to make the HTTP request conditional: if the requested documented has not been modified since the time specified in the field, a copy of the document will not be returned from the server; instead, a 304 (not modified) response will be returned by the server and the component throws an exception
The format of the date value for IfModifiedSince is detailed in the HTTP specs. For example:
Sat, 29 Oct 2017 19:43:31 GMT.
If true, the component will not send the Connection: Close header. The absence of the Connection header indicates to the server that HTTP persistent connections should be used if supported. Note: Not all servers support persistent connections. If false, the connection will be closed immediately after the server response is received.
The default value for KeepAlive is false.
If the Service Principal Name on the Kerberos Domain Controller is not the same as the URL that you are authenticating to, the Service Principal Name should be set here.
This configuration setting controls the level of detail that is logged through the Log event. Possible values are as follows:
0 (None) | No events are logged. |
1 (Info - default) | Informational events are logged. |
2 (Verbose) | Detailed data are logged. |
3 (Debug) | Debug data are logged. |
The value 1 (Info) logs basic information, including the URL, HTTP version, and status details.
The value 2 (Verbose) logs additional information about the request and response.
The value 3 (Debug) logs the headers and body for both the request and response, as well as additional debug information (if any).
When FollowRedirects is set to any value other than frNever, the class will follow redirects until this maximum number of redirect attempts are made. The default value is 20.
This configuration setting may be queried after the request is complete to indicate the HTTP version used. When HTTPVersion is set to "2.0" (if the server does not support "2.0"), then the class will fall back to using "1.1" automatically. This setting will indicate which version was used.
This configuration setting can be set to a string of headers to be appended to the HTTP request headers.
The headers must follow the format "header: value" as described in the HTTP specifications. Header lines should be separated by CRLF ("\r\n") .
Use this configuration setting with caution. If this configuration setting contains invalid headers, HTTP requests may fail.
This configuration setting is useful for extending the functionality of the class beyond what is provided.
This is similar to the Authorization configuration setting, but is used for proxy authorization. If this configuration setting contains a nonempty string, a Proxy-Authorization HTTP request header is added to the request. This header conveys proxy Authorization information to the server. If User and Password are specified, this value is calculated using the algorithm specified by AuthScheme.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.
This configuration setting returns the complete set of raw headers as sent by the client.
This configuration setting contains the result code of the last response from the server.
This setting contains the first line of the last response from the server. The format of the line will be [HTTP version] [Result Code] [Description].
This configuration setting contains the contents of the last response from the server.
If TransferredDataLimit is set to 0 (default), no limits are imposed. Otherwise, this reflects the maximum number of incoming bytes that can be stored by the class.
This configuration setting returns the complete set of raw headers as received from the server.
This configuration setting returns the full request as sent by the client. For performance reasons, the request is not normally saved. Set this configuration setting to ON before making a request to enable it. Following are examples of this request:
.NET
Http http = new Http();
http.Config("TransferredRequest=on");
http.PostData = "body";
http.Post("http://someserver.com");
Console.WriteLine(http.Config("TransferredRequest"));
C++
HTTP http;
http.Config("TransferredRequest=on");
http.SetPostData("body", 5);
http.Post("http://someserver.com");
printf("%s\r\n", http.Config("TransferredRequest"));
If UseChunkedEncoding is set to True, the class will use HTTP-chunked encoding when posting, if possible. HTTP-chunked encoding allows large files to be sent in chunks instead of all at once. If set to False, the class will not use HTTP-chunked encoding. The default value is False.
Note: Some servers (such as the ASP.NET Development Server) may not support chunked encoding.
This configuration setting specifies whether hostnames containing non-ASCII characters are encoded to internationalized domain names. When set to True, if a hostname contains non-ASCII characters, it is encoded using Punycode to an IDN (internationalized domain name).
The default value is False and the hostname will always be used exactly as specified. Note: The CodePage setting must be set to a value capable of interpreting the specified host name. For instance, to specify UTF-8, set CodePage to 65001. In the C++ Edition for Windows, the *W version of the class must be used. For instance, DNSW or HTTPW.
When using this configuration setting, if True, the component will use the default HTTP client for the platform (URLConnection in Java, WebRequest in .NET, or CFHTTPMessage in Mac/iOS) instead of the internal HTTP implementation. This is important for environments in which direct access to sockets is limited or not allowed (e.g., in the Google AppEngine).
Note: This setting is applicable only to Mac/iOS editions.
This configuration specifies whether the class will attempt to use the Proxy auto-config URL when establishing a connection and AutoDetect is set to True.
When True (default), the class will check for the existence of a Proxy auto-config URL, and if found, will determine the appropriate proxy to use.
This is the value supplied in the HTTP User-Agent header. The default setting is "IPWorks HTTP Component - www.nsoftware.com".
Override the default with the name and version of your software.
TCPClient Config Settings
When set, this configuration setting allows you to specify a different timeout value for establishing a connection. Otherwise, the class will use Timeout for establishing a connection and transmitting/receiving data. Sets a separate timeout value for establishing a connection.
When set, this configuration setting allows you to specify a different timeout value for establishing a connection. Otherwise, the class will use Timeout for establishing a connection and transmitting/receiving data.
When set, this configuration setting allows you to specify a different timeout value for establishing a connection. Otherwise, the class will use Timeout for establishing a connection and transmitting/receiving data. Sets a separate timeout value for establishing a connection.
When set, this configuration setting allows you to specify a different timeout value for establishing a connection. Otherwise, the class will use Timeout for establishing a connection and transmitting/receiving data.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties. Tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use firewall system settings, if available.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties. Tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use firewall system settings, if available.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
If a FirewallHost is given, requested connections will be authenticated through the specified firewall when connecting.
If the FirewallHost setting is set to a Domain Name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the FirewallHost setting is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Name or IP address of firewall (optional).If a FirewallHost is given, requested connections will be authenticated through the specified firewall when connecting.
If the FirewallHost setting is set to a Domain Name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the FirewallHost setting is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
If a FirewallHost is given, requested connections will be authenticated through the specified firewall when connecting.
If the FirewallHost setting is set to a Domain Name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the FirewallHost setting is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Name or IP address of firewall (optional).If a FirewallHost is given, requested connections will be authenticated through the specified firewall when connecting.
If the FirewallHost setting is set to a Domain Name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the FirewallHost setting is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
If FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the given firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Password to be used if authentication is to be used when connecting through the firewall.If FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the given firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
If FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the given firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Password to be used if authentication is to be used when connecting through the firewall.If FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the given firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
The FirewallPort is set automatically when FirewallType is set to a valid value.
Note: This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
The TCP port for the FirewallHost;.The FirewallPort is set automatically when FirewallType is set to a valid value.
Note: This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
The FirewallPort is set automatically when FirewallType is set to a valid value.
Note: This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
The TCP port for the FirewallHost;.The FirewallPort is set automatically when FirewallType is set to a valid value.
Note: This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Possible values are as follows:
0 | No firewall (default setting). |
1 | Connect through a tunneling proxy. FirewallPort is set to 80. |
2 | Connect through a SOCKS4 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
3 | Connect through a SOCKS5 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
10 | Connect through a SOCKS4A Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Determines the type of firewall to connect through.Possible values are as follows:
0 | No firewall (default setting). |
1 | Connect through a tunneling proxy. FirewallPort is set to 80. |
2 | Connect through a SOCKS4 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
3 | Connect through a SOCKS5 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
10 | Connect through a SOCKS4A Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Possible values are as follows:
0 | No firewall (default setting). |
1 | Connect through a tunneling proxy. FirewallPort is set to 80. |
2 | Connect through a SOCKS4 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
3 | Connect through a SOCKS5 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
10 | Connect through a SOCKS4A Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Determines the type of firewall to connect through.Possible values are as follows:
0 | No firewall (default setting). |
1 | Connect through a tunneling proxy. FirewallPort is set to 80. |
2 | Connect through a SOCKS4 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
3 | Connect through a SOCKS5 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
10 | Connect through a SOCKS4A Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
If the FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the Firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
A user name if authentication is to be used connecting through a firewall.If the FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the Firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
If the FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the Firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
A user name if authentication is to be used connecting through a firewall.If the FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the Firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the interval at which the successive keep-alive packets are sent in milliseconds. This system default if this value is not specified here is 1 second.
Note: This value is not applicable in macOS.
The retry interval, in milliseconds, to be used when a TCP keep-alive packet is sent and no response is received.When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the interval at which the successive keep-alive packets are sent in milliseconds. This system default if this value is not specified here is 1 second.
Note: This value is not applicable in macOS.
When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the interval at which the successive keep-alive packets are sent in milliseconds. This system default if this value is not specified here is 1 second.
Note: This value is not applicable in macOS.
The retry interval, in milliseconds, to be used when a TCP keep-alive packet is sent and no response is received.When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the interval at which the successive keep-alive packets are sent in milliseconds. This system default if this value is not specified here is 1 second.
Note: This value is not applicable in macOS.
When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the number of times that the keep-alive packets will be sent before the remote host is considered disconnected. The system default if this value is not specified here is 9.
Note: This configuration setting is only available in the Unix platform. It is not supported in masOS or FreeBSD.
The number of keep-alive packets to be sent before the remotehost is considered disconnected.When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the number of times that the keep-alive packets will be sent before the remote host is considered disconnected. The system default if this value is not specified here is 9.
Note: This configuration setting is only available in the Unix platform. It is not supported in masOS or FreeBSD.
When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the number of times that the keep-alive packets will be sent before the remote host is considered disconnected. The system default if this value is not specified here is 9.
Note: This configuration setting is only available in the Unix platform. It is not supported in masOS or FreeBSD.
The number of keep-alive packets to be sent before the remotehost is considered disconnected.When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the number of times that the keep-alive packets will be sent before the remote host is considered disconnected. The system default if this value is not specified here is 9.
Note: This configuration setting is only available in the Unix platform. It is not supported in masOS or FreeBSD.
When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. By default, the operating system will determine the time a connection is idle before a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet is sent. This system default if this value is not specified here is 2 hours. In many cases, a shorter interval is more useful. Set this value to the desired interval in milliseconds.
The inactivity time in milliseconds before a TCP keep-alive packet is sent.When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. By default, the operating system will determine the time a connection is idle before a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet is sent. This system default if this value is not specified here is 2 hours. In many cases, a shorter interval is more useful. Set this value to the desired interval in milliseconds.
When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. By default, the operating system will determine the time a connection is idle before a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet is sent. This system default if this value is not specified here is 2 hours. In many cases, a shorter interval is more useful. Set this value to the desired interval in milliseconds.
The inactivity time in milliseconds before a TCP keep-alive packet is sent.When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. By default, the operating system will determine the time a connection is idle before a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet is sent. This system default if this value is not specified here is 2 hours. In many cases, a shorter interval is more useful. Set this value to the desired interval in milliseconds.
This property controls how a connection is closed. The default is True.
In the case that Linger is True (default), two scenarios determine how long the connection will linger. In the first, if LingerTime is 0 (default), the system will attempt to send pending data for a connection until the default IP timeout expires.
In the second scenario, if LingerTime is a positive value, the system will attempt to send pending data until the specified LingerTime is reached. If this attempt fails, then the system will reset the connection.
The default behavior (which is also the default mode for stream sockets) might result in a long delay in closing the connection. Although the class returns control immediately, the system could hold system resources until all pending data are sent (even after your application closes).
Setting this property to False forces an immediate disconnection. If you know that the other side has received all the data you sent (e.g., by a client acknowledgment), setting this property to False might be the appropriate course of action.
When set to True, connections are terminated gracefully.This property controls how a connection is closed. The default is True.
In the case that Linger is True (default), two scenarios determine how long the connection will linger. In the first, if LingerTime is 0 (default), the system will attempt to send pending data for a connection until the default IP timeout expires.
In the second scenario, if LingerTime is a positive value, the system will attempt to send pending data until the specified LingerTime is reached. If this attempt fails, then the system will reset the connection.
The default behavior (which is also the default mode for stream sockets) might result in a long delay in closing the connection. Although the class returns control immediately, the system could hold system resources until all pending data are sent (even after your application closes).
Setting this property to False forces an immediate disconnection. If you know that the other side has received all the data you sent (e.g., by a client acknowledgment), setting this property to False might be the appropriate course of action.
This property controls how a connection is closed. The default is True.
In the case that Linger is True (default), two scenarios determine how long the connection will linger. In the first, if LingerTime is 0 (default), the system will attempt to send pending data for a connection until the default IP timeout expires.
In the second scenario, if LingerTime is a positive value, the system will attempt to send pending data until the specified LingerTime is reached. If this attempt fails, then the system will reset the connection.
The default behavior (which is also the default mode for stream sockets) might result in a long delay in closing the connection. Although the class returns control immediately, the system could hold system resources until all pending data are sent (even after your application closes).
Setting this property to False forces an immediate disconnection. If you know that the other side has received all the data you sent (e.g., by a client acknowledgment), setting this property to False might be the appropriate course of action.
When set to True, connections are terminated gracefully.This property controls how a connection is closed. The default is True.
In the case that Linger is True (default), two scenarios determine how long the connection will linger. In the first, if LingerTime is 0 (default), the system will attempt to send pending data for a connection until the default IP timeout expires.
In the second scenario, if LingerTime is a positive value, the system will attempt to send pending data until the specified LingerTime is reached. If this attempt fails, then the system will reset the connection.
The default behavior (which is also the default mode for stream sockets) might result in a long delay in closing the connection. Although the class returns control immediately, the system could hold system resources until all pending data are sent (even after your application closes).
Setting this property to False forces an immediate disconnection. If you know that the other side has received all the data you sent (e.g., by a client acknowledgment), setting this property to False might be the appropriate course of action.
LingerTime is the time, in seconds, the socket connection will linger. This value is 0 by default, which means it will use the default IP timeout. Time in seconds to have the connection linger.
LingerTime is the time, in seconds, the socket connection will linger. This value is 0 by default, which means it will use the default IP timeout.
LingerTime is the time, in seconds, the socket connection will linger. This value is 0 by default, which means it will use the default IP timeout. Time in seconds to have the connection linger.
LingerTime is the time, in seconds, the socket connection will linger. This value is 0 by default, which means it will use the default IP timeout.
The LocalHost setting contains the name of the local host as obtained by the gethostname() system call, or if the user has assigned an IP address, the value of that address.
In multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface), setting LocalHost to the value of an interface will make the class initiate connections (or accept in the case of server classs) only through that interface.
If the class is connected, the LocalHost setting shows the IP address of the interface through which the connection is made in internet dotted format (aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd). In most cases, this is the address of the local host, except for multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface).
The name of the local host through which connections are initiated or accepted.The LocalHost setting contains the name of the local host as obtained by the gethostname() system call, or if the user has assigned an IP address, the value of that address.
In multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface), setting LocalHost to the value of an interface will make the class initiate connections (or accept in the case of server classs) only through that interface.
If the class is connected, the LocalHost setting shows the IP address of the interface through which the connection is made in internet dotted format (aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd). In most cases, this is the address of the local host, except for multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface).
The LocalHost setting contains the name of the local host as obtained by the gethostname() system call, or if the user has assigned an IP address, the value of that address.
In multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface), setting LocalHost to the value of an interface will make the class initiate connections (or accept in the case of server classs) only through that interface.
If the class is connected, the LocalHost setting shows the IP address of the interface through which the connection is made in internet dotted format (aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd). In most cases, this is the address of the local host, except for multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface).
The name of the local host through which connections are initiated or accepted.The LocalHost setting contains the name of the local host as obtained by the gethostname() system call, or if the user has assigned an IP address, the value of that address.
In multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface), setting LocalHost to the value of an interface will make the class initiate connections (or accept in the case of server classs) only through that interface.
If the class is connected, the LocalHost setting shows the IP address of the interface through which the connection is made in internet dotted format (aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd). In most cases, this is the address of the local host, except for multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface).
This configuration setting must be set before a connection is attempted. It instructs the class to bind to a specific port (or communication endpoint) in the local machine.
Setting this to 0 (default) enables the system to choose a port at random. The chosen port will be shown by LocalPort after the connection is established.
LocalPort cannot be changed once a connection is made. Any attempt to set this when a connection is active will generate an error.
This configuration setting is useful when trying to connect to services that require a trusted port on the client side. An example is the remote shell (rsh) service in UNIX systems.
The port in the local host where the class binds.This configuration setting must be set before a connection is attempted. It instructs the class to bind to a specific port (or communication endpoint) in the local machine.
Setting this to 0 (default) enables the system to choose a port at random. The chosen port will be shown by LocalPort after the connection is established.
LocalPort cannot be changed once a connection is made. Any attempt to set this when a connection is active will generate an error.
This configuration setting is useful when trying to connect to services that require a trusted port on the client side. An example is the remote shell (rsh) service in UNIX systems.
This configuration setting must be set before a connection is attempted. It instructs the class to bind to a specific port (or communication endpoint) in the local machine.
Setting this to 0 (default) enables the system to choose a port at random. The chosen port will be shown by LocalPort after the connection is established.
LocalPort cannot be changed once a connection is made. Any attempt to set this when a connection is active will generate an error.
This configuration setting is useful when trying to connect to services that require a trusted port on the client side. An example is the remote shell (rsh) service in UNIX systems.
The port in the local host where the class binds.This configuration setting must be set before a connection is attempted. It instructs the class to bind to a specific port (or communication endpoint) in the local machine.
Setting this to 0 (default) enables the system to choose a port at random. The chosen port will be shown by LocalPort after the connection is established.
LocalPort cannot be changed once a connection is made. Any attempt to set this when a connection is active will generate an error.
This configuration setting is useful when trying to connect to services that require a trusted port on the client side. An example is the remote shell (rsh) service in UNIX systems.
MaxLineLength is the size of an internal buffer, which holds received data while waiting for an EOL string.
If an EOL string is found in the input stream before MaxLineLength bytes are received, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to True, and the buffer is reset.
If no EOL is found, and MaxLineLength bytes are accumulated in the buffer, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to False, and the buffer is reset.
The minimum value for MaxLineLength is 256 bytes. The default value is 2048 bytes.
The maximum amount of data to accumulate when no EOL is found.MaxLineLength is the size of an internal buffer, which holds received data while waiting for an EOL string.
If an EOL string is found in the input stream before MaxLineLength bytes are received, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to True, and the buffer is reset.
If no EOL is found, and MaxLineLength bytes are accumulated in the buffer, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to False, and the buffer is reset.
The minimum value for MaxLineLength is 256 bytes. The default value is 2048 bytes.
MaxLineLength is the size of an internal buffer, which holds received data while waiting for an EOL string.
If an EOL string is found in the input stream before MaxLineLength bytes are received, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to True, and the buffer is reset.
If no EOL is found, and MaxLineLength bytes are accumulated in the buffer, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to False, and the buffer is reset.
The minimum value for MaxLineLength is 256 bytes. The default value is 2048 bytes.
The maximum amount of data to accumulate when no EOL is found.MaxLineLength is the size of an internal buffer, which holds received data while waiting for an EOL string.
If an EOL string is found in the input stream before MaxLineLength bytes are received, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to True, and the buffer is reset.
If no EOL is found, and MaxLineLength bytes are accumulated in the buffer, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to False, and the buffer is reset.
The minimum value for MaxLineLength is 256 bytes. The default value is 2048 bytes.
This configuration setting can be used to throttle outbound TCP traffic. Set this to the number of bytes to be sent per second. By default, this is not set and there is no limit. The transfer rate limit in bytes per second.
This configuration setting can be used to throttle outbound TCP traffic. Set this to the number of bytes to be sent per second. By default, this is not set and there is no limit.
This configuration setting can be used to throttle outbound TCP traffic. Set this to the number of bytes to be sent per second. By default, this is not set and there is no limit. The transfer rate limit in bytes per second.
This configuration setting can be used to throttle outbound TCP traffic. Set this to the number of bytes to be sent per second. By default, this is not set and there is no limit.
This configuration setting optionally specifies a semicolon-separated list of hostnames or IP addresses to bypass when a proxy is in use. When requests are made to hosts specified in this property, the proxy will not be used. For instance:
www.google.com;www.example.com
A semicolon separated list of hosts and IPs to bypass when using a proxy.This configuration setting optionally specifies a semicolon-separated list of hostnames or IP addresses to bypass when a proxy is in use. When requests are made to hosts specified in this property, the proxy will not be used. For instance:
www.google.com;www.example.com
This configuration setting optionally specifies a semicolon-separated list of hostnames or IP addresses to bypass when a proxy is in use. When requests are made to hosts specified in this property, the proxy will not be used. For instance:
www.google.com;www.example.com
A semicolon separated list of hosts and IPs to bypass when using a proxy.This configuration setting optionally specifies a semicolon-separated list of hostnames or IP addresses to bypass when a proxy is in use. When requests are made to hosts specified in this property, the proxy will not be used. For instance:
www.google.com;www.example.com
If set to True, the socket's keep-alive option is enabled and keep-alive packets will be sent periodically to maintain the connection. Set KeepAliveTime and KeepAliveInterval to configure the timing of the keep-alive packets.
Note: This value is not applicable in Java.
Determines whether or not the keep alive socket option is enabled.If set to True, the socket's keep-alive option is enabled and keep-alive packets will be sent periodically to maintain the connection. Set KeepAliveTime and KeepAliveInterval to configure the timing of the keep-alive packets.
Note: This value is not applicable in Java.
If set to True, the socket's keep-alive option is enabled and keep-alive packets will be sent periodically to maintain the connection. Set KeepAliveTime and KeepAliveInterval to configure the timing of the keep-alive packets.
Note: This value is not applicable in Java.
Determines whether or not the keep alive socket option is enabled.If set to True, the socket's keep-alive option is enabled and keep-alive packets will be sent periodically to maintain the connection. Set KeepAliveTime and KeepAliveInterval to configure the timing of the keep-alive packets.
Note: This value is not applicable in Java.
When set to True, the socket will send all data that are ready to send at once. When set to False, the socket will send smaller buffered packets of data at small intervals. This is known as the Nagle algorithm.
By default, this configuration setting is set to False.
Whether or not to delay when sending packets.When set to True, the socket will send all data that are ready to send at once. When set to False, the socket will send smaller buffered packets of data at small intervals. This is known as the Nagle algorithm.
By default, this configuration setting is set to False.
When set to True, the socket will send all data that are ready to send at once. When set to False, the socket will send smaller buffered packets of data at small intervals. This is known as the Nagle algorithm.
By default, this configuration setting is set to False.
Whether or not to delay when sending packets.When set to True, the socket will send all data that are ready to send at once. When set to False, the socket will send smaller buffered packets of data at small intervals. This is known as the Nagle algorithm.
By default, this configuration setting is set to False.
When set to 0 (default), the class will use IPv4 exclusively. When set to 1, the class will use IPv6 exclusively. To instruct the class to prefer IPv6 addresses, but use IPv4 if IPv6 is not supported on the system, this setting should be set to 2. The default value is 0. Possible values are as follows:
0 | IPv4 only |
1 | IPv6 only |
2 | IPv6 with IPv4 fallback |
When set to 0 (default), the class will use IPv4 exclusively. When set to 1, the class will use IPv6 exclusively. To instruct the class to prefer IPv6 addresses, but use IPv4 if IPv6 is not supported on the system, this setting should be set to 2. The default value is 0. Possible values are as follows:
0 | IPv4 only |
1 | IPv6 only |
2 | IPv6 with IPv4 fallback |
When set to 0 (default), the class will use IPv4 exclusively. When set to 1, the class will use IPv6 exclusively. To instruct the class to prefer IPv6 addresses, but use IPv4 if IPv6 is not supported on the system, this setting should be set to 2. The default value is 0. Possible values are as follows:
0 | IPv4 only |
1 | IPv6 only |
2 | IPv6 with IPv4 fallback |
When set to 0 (default), the class will use IPv4 exclusively. When set to 1, the class will use IPv6 exclusively. To instruct the class to prefer IPv6 addresses, but use IPv4 if IPv6 is not supported on the system, this setting should be set to 2. The default value is 0. Possible values are as follows:
0 | IPv4 only |
1 | IPv6 only |
2 | IPv6 with IPv4 fallback |
SSL Config Settings
When SSLProvider is set to Internal, this configuration setting controls whether Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) packets should be logged. By default, this configuration setting is False, as it is useful only for debugging purposes.
When enabled, SSL packet logs are output using the SSLStatus event, which will fire each time an SSL packet is sent or received.
Enabling this configuration setting has no effect if SSLProvider is set to Platform.
Controls whether SSL packets are logged when using the internal security API.When SSLProvider is set to Internal, this configuration setting controls whether Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) packets should be logged. By default, this configuration setting is False, as it is useful only for debugging purposes.
When enabled, SSL packet logs are output using the SSLStatus event, which will fire each time an SSL packet is sent or received.
Enabling this configuration setting has no effect if SSLProvider is set to Platform.
When SSLProvider is set to Internal, this configuration setting controls whether Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) packets should be logged. By default, this configuration setting is False, as it is useful only for debugging purposes.
When enabled, SSL packet logs are output using the SSLStatus event, which will fire each time an SSL packet is sent or received.
Enabling this configuration setting has no effect if SSLProvider is set to Platform.
Controls whether SSL packets are logged when using the internal security API.When SSLProvider is set to Internal, this configuration setting controls whether Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) packets should be logged. By default, this configuration setting is False, as it is useful only for debugging purposes.
When enabled, SSL packet logs are output using the SSLStatus event, which will fire each time an SSL packet is sent or received.
Enabling this configuration setting has no effect if SSLProvider is set to Platform.
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The path set by this property should point to a directory containing CA certificates in PEM format. The files each contain one CA certificate. The files are looked up by the CA subject name hash value, which must hence be available. If more than one CA certificate with the same name hash value exist, the extension must be different (e.g., 9d66eef0.0, 9d66eef0.1). OpenSSL recommends the use of the c_rehash utility to create the necessary links. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
The path to a directory containing CA certificates.This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The path set by this property should point to a directory containing CA certificates in PEM format. The files each contain one CA certificate. The files are looked up by the CA subject name hash value, which must hence be available. If more than one CA certificate with the same name hash value exist, the extension must be different (e.g., 9d66eef0.0, 9d66eef0.1). OpenSSL recommends the use of the c_rehash utility to create the necessary links. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The path set by this property should point to a directory containing CA certificates in PEM format. The files each contain one CA certificate. The files are looked up by the CA subject name hash value, which must hence be available. If more than one CA certificate with the same name hash value exist, the extension must be different (e.g., 9d66eef0.0, 9d66eef0.1). OpenSSL recommends the use of the c_rehash utility to create the necessary links. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
The path to a directory containing CA certificates.This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The path set by this property should point to a directory containing CA certificates in PEM format. The files each contain one CA certificate. The files are looked up by the CA subject name hash value, which must hence be available. If more than one CA certificate with the same name hash value exist, the extension must be different (e.g., 9d66eef0.0, 9d66eef0.1). OpenSSL recommends the use of the c_rehash utility to create the necessary links. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The file set by this property should contain a list of CA certificates in PEM format. The file can contain several CA certificates identified by the following sequences:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
... (CA certificate in base64 encoding) ...
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
Before, between, and after the certificate text is allowed, which can be used, for example, for descriptions of the certificates. Refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
Name of the file containing the list of CA's trusted by your application.This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The file set by this property should contain a list of CA certificates in PEM format. The file can contain several CA certificates identified by the following sequences:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
... (CA certificate in base64 encoding) ...
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
Before, between, and after the certificate text is allowed, which can be used, for example, for descriptions of the certificates. Refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The file set by this property should contain a list of CA certificates in PEM format. The file can contain several CA certificates identified by the following sequences:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
... (CA certificate in base64 encoding) ...
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
Before, between, and after the certificate text is allowed, which can be used, for example, for descriptions of the certificates. Refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
Name of the file containing the list of CA's trusted by your application.This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The file set by this property should contain a list of CA certificates in PEM format. The file can contain several CA certificates identified by the following sequences:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
... (CA certificate in base64 encoding) ...
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
Before, between, and after the certificate text is allowed, which can be used, for example, for descriptions of the certificates. Refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The format of this string is described in the OpenSSL man page ciphers(1) section "CIPHER LIST FORMAT". Please refer to it for details. The default string "DEFAULT" is determined at compile time and is normally equivalent to "ALL:!ADH:RC4+RSA:+SSLv2:@STRENGTH".
A string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL.This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The format of this string is described in the OpenSSL man page ciphers(1) section "CIPHER LIST FORMAT". Please refer to it for details. The default string "DEFAULT" is determined at compile time and is normally equivalent to "ALL:!ADH:RC4+RSA:+SSLv2:@STRENGTH".
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The format of this string is described in the OpenSSL man page ciphers(1) section "CIPHER LIST FORMAT". Please refer to it for details. The default string "DEFAULT" is determined at compile time and is normally equivalent to "ALL:!ADH:RC4+RSA:+SSLv2:@STRENGTH".
A string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL.This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The format of this string is described in the OpenSSL man page ciphers(1) section "CIPHER LIST FORMAT". Please refer to it for details. The default string "DEFAULT" is determined at compile time and is normally equivalent to "ALL:!ADH:RC4+RSA:+SSLv2:@STRENGTH".
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
By default, OpenSSL uses the device file "/dev/urandom" to seed the PRNG, and setting OpenSSLPrngSeedData is not required. If set, the string specified is used to seed the PRNG.
The data to seed the pseudo random number generator (PRNG).This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
By default, OpenSSL uses the device file "/dev/urandom" to seed the PRNG, and setting OpenSSLPrngSeedData is not required. If set, the string specified is used to seed the PRNG.
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
By default, OpenSSL uses the device file "/dev/urandom" to seed the PRNG, and setting OpenSSLPrngSeedData is not required. If set, the string specified is used to seed the PRNG.
The data to seed the pseudo random number generator (PRNG).This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
By default, OpenSSL uses the device file "/dev/urandom" to seed the PRNG, and setting OpenSSLPrngSeedData is not required. If set, the string specified is used to seed the PRNG.
If set to True, the class will reuse the context if and only if the following criteria are met:
- The target host name is the same.
- The system cache entry has not expired (default timeout is 10 hours).
- The application process that calls the function is the same.
- The logon session is the same.
- The instance of the class is the same.
If set to True, the class will reuse the context if and only if the following criteria are met:
- The target host name is the same.
- The system cache entry has not expired (default timeout is 10 hours).
- The application process that calls the function is the same.
- The logon session is the same.
- The instance of the class is the same.
If set to True, the class will reuse the context if and only if the following criteria are met:
- The target host name is the same.
- The system cache entry has not expired (default timeout is 10 hours).
- The application process that calls the function is the same.
- The logon session is the same.
- The instance of the class is the same.
If set to True, the class will reuse the context if and only if the following criteria are met:
- The target host name is the same.
- The system cache entry has not expired (default timeout is 10 hours).
- The application process that calls the function is the same.
- The logon session is the same.
- The instance of the class is the same.
This configuration setting specifies the paths on disk to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.
The value is formatted as a list of paths separated by semicolons. The class will check for the existence of each file in the order specified. When a file is found, the CA certificates within the file will be loaded and used to determine the validity of server or client certificates.
The default value is as follows:
/etc/ssl/ca-bundle.pem;/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt;/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt;/etc/pki/tls/cacert.pem
The paths to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.This configuration setting specifies the paths on disk to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.
The value is formatted as a list of paths separated by semicolons. The class will check for the existence of each file in the order specified. When a file is found, the CA certificates within the file will be loaded and used to determine the validity of server or client certificates.
The default value is as follows:
/etc/ssl/ca-bundle.pem;/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt;/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt;/etc/pki/tls/cacert.pem
This configuration setting specifies the paths on disk to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.
The value is formatted as a list of paths separated by semicolons. The class will check for the existence of each file in the order specified. When a file is found, the CA certificates within the file will be loaded and used to determine the validity of server or client certificates.
The default value is as follows:
/etc/ssl/ca-bundle.pem;/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt;/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt;/etc/pki/tls/cacert.pem
The paths to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.This configuration setting specifies the paths on disk to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.
The value is formatted as a list of paths separated by semicolons. The class will check for the existence of each file in the order specified. When a file is found, the CA certificates within the file will be loaded and used to determine the validity of server or client certificates.
The default value is as follows:
/etc/ssl/ca-bundle.pem;/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt;/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt;/etc/pki/tls/cacert.pem
When SSLProvider is set to Internal, this configuration setting specifies one or more CA certificates to be included with the SSLCert property. Some servers or clients require the entire chain, including CA certificates, to be presented when performing SSL authentication. The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----A newline separated list of CA certificates to be included when performing an SSL handshake.
When SSLProvider is set to Internal, this configuration setting specifies one or more CA certificates to be included with the SSLCert property. Some servers or clients require the entire chain, including CA certificates, to be presented when performing SSL authentication. The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----
When SSLProvider is set to Internal, this configuration setting specifies one or more CA certificates to be included with the SSLCert property. Some servers or clients require the entire chain, including CA certificates, to be presented when performing SSL authentication. The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----A newline separated list of CA certificates to be included when performing an SSL handshake.
When SSLProvider is set to Internal, this configuration setting specifies one or more CA certificates to be included with the SSLCert property. Some servers or clients require the entire chain, including CA certificates, to be presented when performing SSL authentication. The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----
This minimum cipher strength is largely dependent on the security modules installed on the system. If the cipher strength specified is not supported, an error will be returned when connections are initiated.
Note: This configuration setting contains the minimum cipher strength requested from the security library. The actual cipher strength used for the connection is shown by the SSLStatus event.
Use this configuration setting with caution. Requesting a lower cipher strength than necessary could potentially cause serious security vulnerabilities in your application.
When the provider is OpenSSL, SSLCipherStrength is currently not supported. This functionality is instead made available through the OpenSSLCipherList configuration setting.
The minimum cipher strength used for bulk encryption.This minimum cipher strength is largely dependent on the security modules installed on the system. If the cipher strength specified is not supported, an error will be returned when connections are initiated.
Note: This configuration setting contains the minimum cipher strength requested from the security library. The actual cipher strength used for the connection is shown by the SSLStatus event.
Use this configuration setting with caution. Requesting a lower cipher strength than necessary could potentially cause serious security vulnerabilities in your application.
When the provider is OpenSSL, SSLCipherStrength is currently not supported. This functionality is instead made available through the OpenSSLCipherList configuration setting.
This minimum cipher strength is largely dependent on the security modules installed on the system. If the cipher strength specified is not supported, an error will be returned when connections are initiated.
Note: This configuration setting contains the minimum cipher strength requested from the security library. The actual cipher strength used for the connection is shown by the SSLStatus event.
Use this configuration setting with caution. Requesting a lower cipher strength than necessary could potentially cause serious security vulnerabilities in your application.
When the provider is OpenSSL, SSLCipherStrength is currently not supported. This functionality is instead made available through the OpenSSLCipherList configuration setting.
The minimum cipher strength used for bulk encryption.This minimum cipher strength is largely dependent on the security modules installed on the system. If the cipher strength specified is not supported, an error will be returned when connections are initiated.
Note: This configuration setting contains the minimum cipher strength requested from the security library. The actual cipher strength used for the connection is shown by the SSLStatus event.
Use this configuration setting with caution. Requesting a lower cipher strength than necessary could potentially cause serious security vulnerabilities in your application.
When the provider is OpenSSL, SSLCipherStrength is currently not supported. This functionality is instead made available through the OpenSSLCipherList configuration setting.
This configuration setting is only applicable to server components (e.g., TCPServer) see SSLServerCACerts for client components (e.g., TCPClient). This setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when verifying the client certificate that is presented by the client during the SSL handshake when SSLAuthenticateClients is enabled. When verifying the client's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the client's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the client's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL client certificate validation.
This configuration setting is only applicable to server components (e.g., TCPServer) see SSLServerCACerts for client components (e.g., TCPClient). This setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when verifying the client certificate that is presented by the client during the SSL handshake when SSLAuthenticateClients is enabled. When verifying the client's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the client's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the client's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----
This configuration setting is only applicable to server components (e.g., TCPServer) see SSLServerCACerts for client components (e.g., TCPClient). This setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when verifying the client certificate that is presented by the client during the SSL handshake when SSLAuthenticateClients is enabled. When verifying the client's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the client's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the client's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL client certificate validation.
This configuration setting is only applicable to server components (e.g., TCPServer) see SSLServerCACerts for client components (e.g., TCPClient). This setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when verifying the client certificate that is presented by the client during the SSL handshake when SSLAuthenticateClients is enabled. When verifying the client's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the client's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the client's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----
This configuration setting enables the cipher suites to be used in SSL negotiation.
By default, the enabled cipher suites will include all available ciphers ("*").
The special value "*" means that the class will pick all of the supported cipher suites. If SSLEnabledCipherSuites is set to any other value, only the specified cipher suites will be considered.
Multiple cipher suites are separated by semicolons.
Example values when SSLProvider is set to Platform include the following:
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256;CALG_3DES");
Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Platform include the following:
- CALG_3DES
- CALG_3DES_112
- CALG_AES
- CALG_AES_128
- CALG_AES_192
- CALG_AES_256
- CALG_AGREEDKEY_ANY
- CALG_CYLINK_MEK
- CALG_DES
- CALG_DESX
- CALG_DH_EPHEM
- CALG_DH_SF
- CALG_DSS_SIGN
- CALG_ECDH
- CALG_ECDH_EPHEM
- CALG_ECDSA
- CALG_ECMQV
- CALG_HASH_REPLACE_OWF
- CALG_HUGHES_MD5
- CALG_HMAC
- CALG_KEA_KEYX
- CALG_MAC
- CALG_MD2
- CALG_MD4
- CALG_MD5
- CALG_NO_SIGN
- CALG_OID_INFO_CNG_ONLY
- CALG_OID_INFO_PARAMETERS
- CALG_PCT1_MASTER
- CALG_RC2
- CALG_RC4
- CALG_RC5
- CALG_RSA_KEYX
- CALG_RSA_SIGN
- CALG_SCHANNEL_ENC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MAC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MASTER_HASH
- CALG_SEAL
- CALG_SHA
- CALG_SHA1
- CALG_SHA_256
- CALG_SHA_384
- CALG_SHA_512
- CALG_SKIPJACK
- CALG_SSL2_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_SHAMD5
- CALG_TEK
- CALG_TLS1_MASTER
- CALG_TLS1PRF
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA;TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Internal include the following:
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
When TLS 1.3 is negotiated (see SSLEnabledProtocols), only the following cipher suites are supported:
- TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
- TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
SSLEnabledCipherSuites is used together with SSLCipherStrength.
The cipher suite to be used in an SSL negotiation.This configuration setting enables the cipher suites to be used in SSL negotiation.
By default, the enabled cipher suites will include all available ciphers ("*").
The special value "*" means that the class will pick all of the supported cipher suites. If SSLEnabledCipherSuites is set to any other value, only the specified cipher suites will be considered.
Multiple cipher suites are separated by semicolons.
Example values when SSLProvider is set to Platform include the following:
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256;CALG_3DES");
Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Platform include the following:
- CALG_3DES
- CALG_3DES_112
- CALG_AES
- CALG_AES_128
- CALG_AES_192
- CALG_AES_256
- CALG_AGREEDKEY_ANY
- CALG_CYLINK_MEK
- CALG_DES
- CALG_DESX
- CALG_DH_EPHEM
- CALG_DH_SF
- CALG_DSS_SIGN
- CALG_ECDH
- CALG_ECDH_EPHEM
- CALG_ECDSA
- CALG_ECMQV
- CALG_HASH_REPLACE_OWF
- CALG_HUGHES_MD5
- CALG_HMAC
- CALG_KEA_KEYX
- CALG_MAC
- CALG_MD2
- CALG_MD4
- CALG_MD5
- CALG_NO_SIGN
- CALG_OID_INFO_CNG_ONLY
- CALG_OID_INFO_PARAMETERS
- CALG_PCT1_MASTER
- CALG_RC2
- CALG_RC4
- CALG_RC5
- CALG_RSA_KEYX
- CALG_RSA_SIGN
- CALG_SCHANNEL_ENC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MAC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MASTER_HASH
- CALG_SEAL
- CALG_SHA
- CALG_SHA1
- CALG_SHA_256
- CALG_SHA_384
- CALG_SHA_512
- CALG_SKIPJACK
- CALG_SSL2_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_SHAMD5
- CALG_TEK
- CALG_TLS1_MASTER
- CALG_TLS1PRF
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA;TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Internal include the following:
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
When TLS 1.3 is negotiated (see SSLEnabledProtocols), only the following cipher suites are supported:
- TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
- TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
SSLEnabledCipherSuites is used together with SSLCipherStrength.
This configuration setting enables the cipher suites to be used in SSL negotiation.
By default, the enabled cipher suites will include all available ciphers ("*").
The special value "*" means that the class will pick all of the supported cipher suites. If SSLEnabledCipherSuites is set to any other value, only the specified cipher suites will be considered.
Multiple cipher suites are separated by semicolons.
Example values when SSLProvider is set to Platform include the following:
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256;CALG_3DES");
Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Platform include the following:
- CALG_3DES
- CALG_3DES_112
- CALG_AES
- CALG_AES_128
- CALG_AES_192
- CALG_AES_256
- CALG_AGREEDKEY_ANY
- CALG_CYLINK_MEK
- CALG_DES
- CALG_DESX
- CALG_DH_EPHEM
- CALG_DH_SF
- CALG_DSS_SIGN
- CALG_ECDH
- CALG_ECDH_EPHEM
- CALG_ECDSA
- CALG_ECMQV
- CALG_HASH_REPLACE_OWF
- CALG_HUGHES_MD5
- CALG_HMAC
- CALG_KEA_KEYX
- CALG_MAC
- CALG_MD2
- CALG_MD4
- CALG_MD5
- CALG_NO_SIGN
- CALG_OID_INFO_CNG_ONLY
- CALG_OID_INFO_PARAMETERS
- CALG_PCT1_MASTER
- CALG_RC2
- CALG_RC4
- CALG_RC5
- CALG_RSA_KEYX
- CALG_RSA_SIGN
- CALG_SCHANNEL_ENC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MAC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MASTER_HASH
- CALG_SEAL
- CALG_SHA
- CALG_SHA1
- CALG_SHA_256
- CALG_SHA_384
- CALG_SHA_512
- CALG_SKIPJACK
- CALG_SSL2_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_SHAMD5
- CALG_TEK
- CALG_TLS1_MASTER
- CALG_TLS1PRF
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA;TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Internal include the following:
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
When TLS 1.3 is negotiated (see SSLEnabledProtocols), only the following cipher suites are supported:
- TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
- TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
SSLEnabledCipherSuites is used together with SSLCipherStrength.
The cipher suite to be used in an SSL negotiation.This configuration setting enables the cipher suites to be used in SSL negotiation.
By default, the enabled cipher suites will include all available ciphers ("*").
The special value "*" means that the class will pick all of the supported cipher suites. If SSLEnabledCipherSuites is set to any other value, only the specified cipher suites will be considered.
Multiple cipher suites are separated by semicolons.
Example values when SSLProvider is set to Platform include the following:
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256;CALG_3DES");
Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Platform include the following:
- CALG_3DES
- CALG_3DES_112
- CALG_AES
- CALG_AES_128
- CALG_AES_192
- CALG_AES_256
- CALG_AGREEDKEY_ANY
- CALG_CYLINK_MEK
- CALG_DES
- CALG_DESX
- CALG_DH_EPHEM
- CALG_DH_SF
- CALG_DSS_SIGN
- CALG_ECDH
- CALG_ECDH_EPHEM
- CALG_ECDSA
- CALG_ECMQV
- CALG_HASH_REPLACE_OWF
- CALG_HUGHES_MD5
- CALG_HMAC
- CALG_KEA_KEYX
- CALG_MAC
- CALG_MD2
- CALG_MD4
- CALG_MD5
- CALG_NO_SIGN
- CALG_OID_INFO_CNG_ONLY
- CALG_OID_INFO_PARAMETERS
- CALG_PCT1_MASTER
- CALG_RC2
- CALG_RC4
- CALG_RC5
- CALG_RSA_KEYX
- CALG_RSA_SIGN
- CALG_SCHANNEL_ENC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MAC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MASTER_HASH
- CALG_SEAL
- CALG_SHA
- CALG_SHA1
- CALG_SHA_256
- CALG_SHA_384
- CALG_SHA_512
- CALG_SKIPJACK
- CALG_SSL2_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_SHAMD5
- CALG_TEK
- CALG_TLS1_MASTER
- CALG_TLS1PRF
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA;TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Internal include the following:
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
When TLS 1.3 is negotiated (see SSLEnabledProtocols), only the following cipher suites are supported:
- TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
- TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
SSLEnabledCipherSuites is used together with SSLCipherStrength.
This configuration setting is used to enable or disable the supported security protocols.
Not all supported protocols are enabled by default. The default value is 4032 for client components, and 3072 for server components. To specify a combination of enabled protocol versions set this config to the binary OR of one or more of the following values:
TLS1.3 | 12288 (Hex 3000) |
TLS1.2 | 3072 (Hex C00) (Default - Client and Server) |
TLS1.1 | 768 (Hex 300) (Default - Client) |
TLS1 | 192 (Hex C0) (Default - Client) |
SSL3 | 48 (Hex 30) |
SSL2 | 12 (Hex 0C) |
Note that only TLS 1.2 is enabled for server components that accept incoming connections. This adheres to industry standards to ensure a secure connection. Client components enable TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, and TLS 1.2 by default and will negotiate the highest mutually supported version when connecting to a server, which should be TLS 1.2 in most cases.
SSLEnabledProtocols: Transport Layer Security (TLS) 1.3 Notes:
By default when TLS 1.3 is enabled, the class will use the internal TLS implementation when the SSLProvider is set to Automatic for all editions.
In editions that are designed to run on Windows, SSLProvider can be set to Platform to use the platform implementation instead of the internal implementation. When configured in this manner, please note that the platform provider is supported only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up. The default internal provider is available on all platforms and is not restricted to any specific OS version.
If set to 1 (Platform provider), please be aware of the following notes:
- The platform provider is available only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up.
- SSLEnabledCipherSuites and other similar SSL configuration settings are not supported.
- If SSLEnabledProtocols includes both TLS 1.3 and TLS 1.2, these restrictions are still applicable even if TLS 1.2 is negotiated. Enabling TLS 1.3 with the platform provider changes the implementation used for all TLS versions.
SSLEnabledProtocols: SSL2 and SSL3 Notes:
SSL 2.0 and 3.0 are not supported by the class when the SSLProvider is set to internal. To use SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0, the platform security API must have the protocols enabled and SSLProvider needs to be set to platform.
Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols.This configuration setting is used to enable or disable the supported security protocols.
Not all supported protocols are enabled by default. The default value is 4032 for client components, and 3072 for server components. To specify a combination of enabled protocol versions set this config to the binary OR of one or more of the following values:
TLS1.3 | 12288 (Hex 3000) |
TLS1.2 | 3072 (Hex C00) (Default - Client and Server) |
TLS1.1 | 768 (Hex 300) (Default - Client) |
TLS1 | 192 (Hex C0) (Default - Client) |
SSL3 | 48 (Hex 30) |
SSL2 | 12 (Hex 0C) |
Note that only TLS 1.2 is enabled for server components that accept incoming connections. This adheres to industry standards to ensure a secure connection. Client components enable TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, and TLS 1.2 by default and will negotiate the highest mutually supported version when connecting to a server, which should be TLS 1.2 in most cases.
SSLEnabledProtocols: Transport Layer Security (TLS) 1.3 Notes:
By default when TLS 1.3 is enabled, the class will use the internal TLS implementation when the SSLProvider is set to Automatic for all editions.
In editions that are designed to run on Windows, SSLProvider can be set to Platform to use the platform implementation instead of the internal implementation. When configured in this manner, please note that the platform provider is supported only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up. The default internal provider is available on all platforms and is not restricted to any specific OS version.
If set to 1 (Platform provider), please be aware of the following notes:
- The platform provider is available only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up.
- SSLEnabledCipherSuites and other similar SSL configuration settings are not supported.
- If SSLEnabledProtocols includes both TLS 1.3 and TLS 1.2, these restrictions are still applicable even if TLS 1.2 is negotiated. Enabling TLS 1.3 with the platform provider changes the implementation used for all TLS versions.
SSLEnabledProtocols: SSL2 and SSL3 Notes:
SSL 2.0 and 3.0 are not supported by the class when the SSLProvider is set to internal. To use SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0, the platform security API must have the protocols enabled and SSLProvider needs to be set to platform.
This configuration setting is used to enable or disable the supported security protocols.
Not all supported protocols are enabled by default. The default value is 4032 for client components, and 3072 for server components. To specify a combination of enabled protocol versions set this config to the binary OR of one or more of the following values:
TLS1.3 | 12288 (Hex 3000) |
TLS1.2 | 3072 (Hex C00) (Default - Client and Server) |
TLS1.1 | 768 (Hex 300) (Default - Client) |
TLS1 | 192 (Hex C0) (Default - Client) |
SSL3 | 48 (Hex 30) |
SSL2 | 12 (Hex 0C) |
Note that only TLS 1.2 is enabled for server components that accept incoming connections. This adheres to industry standards to ensure a secure connection. Client components enable TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, and TLS 1.2 by default and will negotiate the highest mutually supported version when connecting to a server, which should be TLS 1.2 in most cases.
SSLEnabledProtocols: Transport Layer Security (TLS) 1.3 Notes:
By default when TLS 1.3 is enabled, the class will use the internal TLS implementation when the SSLProvider is set to Automatic for all editions.
In editions that are designed to run on Windows, SSLProvider can be set to Platform to use the platform implementation instead of the internal implementation. When configured in this manner, please note that the platform provider is supported only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up. The default internal provider is available on all platforms and is not restricted to any specific OS version.
If set to 1 (Platform provider), please be aware of the following notes:
- The platform provider is available only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up.
- SSLEnabledCipherSuites and other similar SSL configuration settings are not supported.
- If SSLEnabledProtocols includes both TLS 1.3 and TLS 1.2, these restrictions are still applicable even if TLS 1.2 is negotiated. Enabling TLS 1.3 with the platform provider changes the implementation used for all TLS versions.
SSLEnabledProtocols: SSL2 and SSL3 Notes:
SSL 2.0 and 3.0 are not supported by the class when the SSLProvider is set to internal. To use SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0, the platform security API must have the protocols enabled and SSLProvider needs to be set to platform.
Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols.This configuration setting is used to enable or disable the supported security protocols.
Not all supported protocols are enabled by default. The default value is 4032 for client components, and 3072 for server components. To specify a combination of enabled protocol versions set this config to the binary OR of one or more of the following values:
TLS1.3 | 12288 (Hex 3000) |
TLS1.2 | 3072 (Hex C00) (Default - Client and Server) |
TLS1.1 | 768 (Hex 300) (Default - Client) |
TLS1 | 192 (Hex C0) (Default - Client) |
SSL3 | 48 (Hex 30) |
SSL2 | 12 (Hex 0C) |
Note that only TLS 1.2 is enabled for server components that accept incoming connections. This adheres to industry standards to ensure a secure connection. Client components enable TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, and TLS 1.2 by default and will negotiate the highest mutually supported version when connecting to a server, which should be TLS 1.2 in most cases.
SSLEnabledProtocols: Transport Layer Security (TLS) 1.3 Notes:
By default when TLS 1.3 is enabled, the class will use the internal TLS implementation when the SSLProvider is set to Automatic for all editions.
In editions that are designed to run on Windows, SSLProvider can be set to Platform to use the platform implementation instead of the internal implementation. When configured in this manner, please note that the platform provider is supported only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up. The default internal provider is available on all platforms and is not restricted to any specific OS version.
If set to 1 (Platform provider), please be aware of the following notes:
- The platform provider is available only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up.
- SSLEnabledCipherSuites and other similar SSL configuration settings are not supported.
- If SSLEnabledProtocols includes both TLS 1.3 and TLS 1.2, these restrictions are still applicable even if TLS 1.2 is negotiated. Enabling TLS 1.3 with the platform provider changes the implementation used for all TLS versions.
SSLEnabledProtocols: SSL2 and SSL3 Notes:
SSL 2.0 and 3.0 are not supported by the class when the SSLProvider is set to internal. To use SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0, the platform security API must have the protocols enabled and SSLProvider needs to be set to platform.
This configuration setting specifies whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension will be used in the request when using the internal security API. This configuration setting is false by default, but it can be set to true to enable the extension.
This configuration setting is applicable only when SSLProvider is set to Internal.
Whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension is supported.This configuration setting specifies whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension will be used in the request when using the internal security API. This configuration setting is false by default, but it can be set to true to enable the extension.
This configuration setting is applicable only when SSLProvider is set to Internal.
This configuration setting specifies whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension will be used in the request when using the internal security API. This configuration setting is false by default, but it can be set to true to enable the extension.
This configuration setting is applicable only when SSLProvider is set to Internal.
Whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension is supported.This configuration setting specifies whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension will be used in the request when using the internal security API. This configuration setting is false by default, but it can be set to true to enable the extension.
This configuration setting is applicable only when SSLProvider is set to Internal.
This configuration setting specifies whether the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event contains the full certificate chain. By default this value is False and only the leaf certificate will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event.
If set to True, all certificates returned by the server will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event. This includes the leaf certificate, any intermediate certificate, and the root certificate.
Whether the entire certificate chain is included in the SSLServerAuthentication event.This configuration setting specifies whether the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event contains the full certificate chain. By default this value is False and only the leaf certificate will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event.
If set to True, all certificates returned by the server will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event. This includes the leaf certificate, any intermediate certificate, and the root certificate.
This configuration setting specifies whether the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event contains the full certificate chain. By default this value is False and only the leaf certificate will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event.
If set to True, all certificates returned by the server will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event. This includes the leaf certificate, any intermediate certificate, and the root certificate.
Whether the entire certificate chain is included in the SSLServerAuthentication event.This configuration setting specifies whether the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event contains the full certificate chain. By default this value is False and only the leaf certificate will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event.
If set to True, all certificates returned by the server will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event. This includes the leaf certificate, any intermediate certificate, and the root certificate.
This configuration setting optionally specifies the full path to a file on disk where per-session secrets are stored for debugging purposes.
When set, the class will save the session secrets in the same format as the SSLKEYLOGFILE environment variable functionality used by most major browsers and tools, such as Chrome, Firefox, and cURL. This file can then be used in tools such as Wireshark to decrypt TLS traffic for debugging purposes. When writing to this file, the class will only append, it will not overwrite previous values.
Note: This configuration setting is applicable only when SSLProvider is set to Internal.
The location of a file where per-session secrets are written for debugging purposes.This configuration setting optionally specifies the full path to a file on disk where per-session secrets are stored for debugging purposes.
When set, the class will save the session secrets in the same format as the SSLKEYLOGFILE environment variable functionality used by most major browsers and tools, such as Chrome, Firefox, and cURL. This file can then be used in tools such as Wireshark to decrypt TLS traffic for debugging purposes. When writing to this file, the class will only append, it will not overwrite previous values.
Note: This configuration setting is applicable only when SSLProvider is set to Internal.
This configuration setting optionally specifies the full path to a file on disk where per-session secrets are stored for debugging purposes.
When set, the class will save the session secrets in the same format as the SSLKEYLOGFILE environment variable functionality used by most major browsers and tools, such as Chrome, Firefox, and cURL. This file can then be used in tools such as Wireshark to decrypt TLS traffic for debugging purposes. When writing to this file, the class will only append, it will not overwrite previous values.
Note: This configuration setting is applicable only when SSLProvider is set to Internal.
The location of a file where per-session secrets are written for debugging purposes.This configuration setting optionally specifies the full path to a file on disk where per-session secrets are stored for debugging purposes.
When set, the class will save the session secrets in the same format as the SSLKEYLOGFILE environment variable functionality used by most major browsers and tools, such as Chrome, Firefox, and cURL. This file can then be used in tools such as Wireshark to decrypt TLS traffic for debugging purposes. When writing to this file, the class will only append, it will not overwrite previous values.
Note: This configuration setting is applicable only when SSLProvider is set to Internal.
This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipher[connId]");
Returns the negotiated cipher suite.This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipher[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipher[connId]");
Returns the negotiated cipher suite.This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipher[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the strength of the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength[connId]");
Returns the negotiated cipher suite strength.This configuration setting returns the strength of the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the strength of the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength[connId]");
Returns the negotiated cipher suite strength.This configuration setting returns the strength of the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake represented as a single string.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite[connId]");
Returns the negotiated cipher suite.This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake represented as a single string.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake represented as a single string.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite[connId]");
Returns the negotiated cipher suite.This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake represented as a single string.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange[connId]");
Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm.This configuration setting returns the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange[connId]");
Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm.This configuration setting returns the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the strength of the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength[connId]");
Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm strength.This configuration setting returns the strength of the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the strength of the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength[connId]");
Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm strength.This configuration setting returns the strength of the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the protocol version negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedVersion[connId]");
Returns the negotiated protocol version.This configuration setting returns the protocol version negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedVersion[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the protocol version negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedVersion[connId]");
Returns the negotiated protocol version.This configuration setting returns the protocol version negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedVersion[connId]");
The following flags are defined (specified in hexadecimal notation). They can be ORed together to exclude multiple conditions:
0x00000001 | Ignore time validity status of certificate. |
0x00000002 | Ignore time validity status of CTL. |
0x00000004 | Ignore non-nested certificate times. |
0x00000010 | Allow unknown certificate authority. |
0x00000020 | Ignore wrong certificate usage. |
0x00000100 | Ignore unknown certificate revocation status. |
0x00000200 | Ignore unknown CTL signer revocation status. |
0x00000400 | Ignore unknown certificate authority revocation status. |
0x00000800 | Ignore unknown root revocation status. |
0x00008000 | Allow test root certificate. |
0x00004000 | Trust test root certificate. |
0x80000000 | Ignore non-matching CN (certificate CN non-matching server name). |
This functionality is currently not available when the provider is OpenSSL.
Flags that control certificate verification.The following flags are defined (specified in hexadecimal notation). They can be ORed together to exclude multiple conditions:
0x00000001 | Ignore time validity status of certificate. |
0x00000002 | Ignore time validity status of CTL. |
0x00000004 | Ignore non-nested certificate times. |
0x00000010 | Allow unknown certificate authority. |
0x00000020 | Ignore wrong certificate usage. |
0x00000100 | Ignore unknown certificate revocation status. |
0x00000200 | Ignore unknown CTL signer revocation status. |
0x00000400 | Ignore unknown certificate authority revocation status. |
0x00000800 | Ignore unknown root revocation status. |
0x00008000 | Allow test root certificate. |
0x00004000 | Trust test root certificate. |
0x80000000 | Ignore non-matching CN (certificate CN non-matching server name). |
This functionality is currently not available when the provider is OpenSSL.
The following flags are defined (specified in hexadecimal notation). They can be ORed together to exclude multiple conditions:
0x00000001 | Ignore time validity status of certificate. |
0x00000002 | Ignore time validity status of CTL. |
0x00000004 | Ignore non-nested certificate times. |
0x00000010 | Allow unknown certificate authority. |
0x00000020 | Ignore wrong certificate usage. |
0x00000100 | Ignore unknown certificate revocation status. |
0x00000200 | Ignore unknown CTL signer revocation status. |
0x00000400 | Ignore unknown certificate authority revocation status. |
0x00000800 | Ignore unknown root revocation status. |
0x00008000 | Allow test root certificate. |
0x00004000 | Trust test root certificate. |
0x80000000 | Ignore non-matching CN (certificate CN non-matching server name). |
This functionality is currently not available when the provider is OpenSSL.
Flags that control certificate verification.The following flags are defined (specified in hexadecimal notation). They can be ORed together to exclude multiple conditions:
0x00000001 | Ignore time validity status of certificate. |
0x00000002 | Ignore time validity status of CTL. |
0x00000004 | Ignore non-nested certificate times. |
0x00000010 | Allow unknown certificate authority. |
0x00000020 | Ignore wrong certificate usage. |
0x00000100 | Ignore unknown certificate revocation status. |
0x00000200 | Ignore unknown CTL signer revocation status. |
0x00000400 | Ignore unknown certificate authority revocation status. |
0x00000800 | Ignore unknown root revocation status. |
0x00008000 | Allow test root certificate. |
0x00004000 | Trust test root certificate. |
0x80000000 | Ignore non-matching CN (certificate CN non-matching server name). |
This functionality is currently not available when the provider is OpenSSL.
This configuration setting is only used by client components (e.g., TCPClient) see SSLClientCACerts for server components (e.g., TCPServer). This configuration setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when connecting to the server and verifying the server certificate. When verifying the server's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the server's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the server's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL server certificate validation.
This configuration setting is only used by client components (e.g., TCPClient) see SSLClientCACerts for server components (e.g., TCPServer). This configuration setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when connecting to the server and verifying the server certificate. When verifying the server's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the server's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the server's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----
This configuration setting is only used by client components (e.g., TCPClient) see SSLClientCACerts for server components (e.g., TCPServer). This configuration setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when connecting to the server and verifying the server certificate. When verifying the server's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the server's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the server's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL server certificate validation.
This configuration setting is only used by client components (e.g., TCPClient) see SSLClientCACerts for server components (e.g., TCPServer). This configuration setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when connecting to the server and verifying the server certificate. When verifying the server's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the server's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the server's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----
This configuration setting specifies the allowed server certificate signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal and SSLEnabledProtocols is set to allow TLS 1.2.
When specified the class will verify that the server certificate signature algorithm is among the values specified in this configuration setting. If the server certificate signature algorithm is unsupported, the class fails with an error.
The format of this value is a comma-separated list of hash-signature combinations. For instance:
component.SSLProvider = TCPClientSSLProviders.sslpInternal;
component.Config("SSLEnabledProtocols=3072"); //TLS 1.2
component.Config("TLS12SignatureAlgorithms=sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa");
The default value for this configuration setting is sha512-ecdsa,sha512-rsa,sha512-dsa,sha384-ecdsa,sha384-rsa,sha384-dsa,sha256-ecdsa,sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha224-ecdsa,sha224-rsa,sha224-dsa,sha1-ecdsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa.
To not restrict the server's certificate signature algorithm, specify an empty string as the value for this configuration setting, which will cause the signature_algorithms TLS 1.2 extension to not be sent.
Defines the allowed TLS 1.2 signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal.This configuration setting specifies the allowed server certificate signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal and SSLEnabledProtocols is set to allow TLS 1.2.
When specified the class will verify that the server certificate signature algorithm is among the values specified in this configuration setting. If the server certificate signature algorithm is unsupported, the class fails with an error.
The format of this value is a comma-separated list of hash-signature combinations. For instance:
component.SSLProvider = TCPClientSSLProviders.sslpInternal;
component.Config("SSLEnabledProtocols=3072"); //TLS 1.2
component.Config("TLS12SignatureAlgorithms=sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa");
The default value for this configuration setting is sha512-ecdsa,sha512-rsa,sha512-dsa,sha384-ecdsa,sha384-rsa,sha384-dsa,sha256-ecdsa,sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha224-ecdsa,sha224-rsa,sha224-dsa,sha1-ecdsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa.
To not restrict the server's certificate signature algorithm, specify an empty string as the value for this configuration setting, which will cause the signature_algorithms TLS 1.2 extension to not be sent.
This configuration setting specifies the allowed server certificate signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal and SSLEnabledProtocols is set to allow TLS 1.2.
When specified the class will verify that the server certificate signature algorithm is among the values specified in this configuration setting. If the server certificate signature algorithm is unsupported, the class fails with an error.
The format of this value is a comma-separated list of hash-signature combinations. For instance:
component.SSLProvider = TCPClientSSLProviders.sslpInternal;
component.Config("SSLEnabledProtocols=3072"); //TLS 1.2
component.Config("TLS12SignatureAlgorithms=sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa");
The default value for this configuration setting is sha512-ecdsa,sha512-rsa,sha512-dsa,sha384-ecdsa,sha384-rsa,sha384-dsa,sha256-ecdsa,sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha224-ecdsa,sha224-rsa,sha224-dsa,sha1-ecdsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa.
To not restrict the server's certificate signature algorithm, specify an empty string as the value for this configuration setting, which will cause the signature_algorithms TLS 1.2 extension to not be sent.
Defines the allowed TLS 1.2 signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal.This configuration setting specifies the allowed server certificate signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal and SSLEnabledProtocols is set to allow TLS 1.2.
When specified the class will verify that the server certificate signature algorithm is among the values specified in this configuration setting. If the server certificate signature algorithm is unsupported, the class fails with an error.
The format of this value is a comma-separated list of hash-signature combinations. For instance:
component.SSLProvider = TCPClientSSLProviders.sslpInternal;
component.Config("SSLEnabledProtocols=3072"); //TLS 1.2
component.Config("TLS12SignatureAlgorithms=sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa");
The default value for this configuration setting is sha512-ecdsa,sha512-rsa,sha512-dsa,sha384-ecdsa,sha384-rsa,sha384-dsa,sha256-ecdsa,sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha224-ecdsa,sha224-rsa,sha224-dsa,sha1-ecdsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa.
To not restrict the server's certificate signature algorithm, specify an empty string as the value for this configuration setting, which will cause the signature_algorithms TLS 1.2 extension to not be sent.
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.2 for ECC.
The default value is ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1.
When using TLS 1.2 and SSLProvider is set to Internal, the values refer to the supported groups for ECC. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.2 for ECC.
The default value is ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1.
When using TLS 1.2 and SSLProvider is set to Internal, the values refer to the supported groups for ECC. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.2 for ECC.
The default value is ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1.
When using TLS 1.2 and SSLProvider is set to Internal, the values refer to the supported groups for ECC. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.2 for ECC.
The default value is ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1.
When using TLS 1.2 and SSLProvider is set to Internal, the values refer to the supported groups for ECC. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. The groups specified here will have key share data pregenerated locally before establishing a connection. This can prevent an additional roundtrip during the handshake if the group is supported by the server.
The default value is set to balance common supported groups and the computational resources required to generate key shares. As a result, only some groups are included by default in this configuration setting.
Note: All supported groups can always be used during the handshake even if not listed here, but if a group is used that is not present in this list, it will incur an additional roundtrip and time to generate the key share for that group.
In most cases, this configuration setting does not need to be modified. This should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448"
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1"
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096"
- "ffdhe_6144"
- "ffdhe_8192"
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. The groups specified here will have key share data pregenerated locally before establishing a connection. This can prevent an additional roundtrip during the handshake if the group is supported by the server.
The default value is set to balance common supported groups and the computational resources required to generate key shares. As a result, only some groups are included by default in this configuration setting.
Note: All supported groups can always be used during the handshake even if not listed here, but if a group is used that is not present in this list, it will incur an additional roundtrip and time to generate the key share for that group.
In most cases, this configuration setting does not need to be modified. This should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448"
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1"
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096"
- "ffdhe_6144"
- "ffdhe_8192"
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. The groups specified here will have key share data pregenerated locally before establishing a connection. This can prevent an additional roundtrip during the handshake if the group is supported by the server.
The default value is set to balance common supported groups and the computational resources required to generate key shares. As a result, only some groups are included by default in this configuration setting.
Note: All supported groups can always be used during the handshake even if not listed here, but if a group is used that is not present in this list, it will incur an additional roundtrip and time to generate the key share for that group.
In most cases, this configuration setting does not need to be modified. This should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448"
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1"
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096"
- "ffdhe_6144"
- "ffdhe_8192"
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. The groups specified here will have key share data pregenerated locally before establishing a connection. This can prevent an additional roundtrip during the handshake if the group is supported by the server.
The default value is set to balance common supported groups and the computational resources required to generate key shares. As a result, only some groups are included by default in this configuration setting.
Note: All supported groups can always be used during the handshake even if not listed here, but if a group is used that is not present in this list, it will incur an additional roundtrip and time to generate the key share for that group.
In most cases, this configuration setting does not need to be modified. This should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448"
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1"
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096"
- "ffdhe_6144"
- "ffdhe_8192"
This configuration setting holds a comma-separated list of allowed signature algorithms. Possible values include the following:
- "ed25519" (default)
- "ed448" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha512" (default)
This configuration setting holds a comma-separated list of allowed signature algorithms. Possible values include the following:
- "ed25519" (default)
- "ed448" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha512" (default)
This configuration setting holds a comma-separated list of allowed signature algorithms. Possible values include the following:
- "ed25519" (default)
- "ed448" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha512" (default)
This configuration setting holds a comma-separated list of allowed signature algorithms. Possible values include the following:
- "ed25519" (default)
- "ed448" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha512" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. This configuration setting should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_x448,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072,ffdhe_4096,ffdhe_6144,ffdhe_8192
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096" (default)
- "ffdhe_6144" (default)
- "ffdhe_8192" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. This configuration setting should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_x448,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072,ffdhe_4096,ffdhe_6144,ffdhe_8192
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096" (default)
- "ffdhe_6144" (default)
- "ffdhe_8192" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. This configuration setting should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_x448,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072,ffdhe_4096,ffdhe_6144,ffdhe_8192
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096" (default)
- "ffdhe_6144" (default)
- "ffdhe_8192" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. This configuration setting should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_x448,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072,ffdhe_4096,ffdhe_6144,ffdhe_8192
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096" (default)
- "ffdhe_6144" (default)
- "ffdhe_8192" (default)
Socket Config Settings
If AbsoluteTimeout is set to True, any method that does not complete within Timeout seconds will be aborted. By default, AbsoluteTimeout is False, and the timeout is an inactivity timeout.
Note: This option is not valid for User Datagram Protocol (UDP) ports.
Determines whether timeouts are inactivity timeouts or absolute timeouts.If AbsoluteTimeout is set to True, any method that does not complete within Timeout seconds will be aborted. By default, AbsoluteTimeout is False, and the timeout is an inactivity timeout.
Note: This option is not valid for User Datagram Protocol (UDP) ports.
If AbsoluteTimeout is set to True, any method that does not complete within Timeout seconds will be aborted. By default, AbsoluteTimeout is False, and the timeout is an inactivity timeout.
Note: This option is not valid for User Datagram Protocol (UDP) ports.
Determines whether timeouts are inactivity timeouts or absolute timeouts.If AbsoluteTimeout is set to True, any method that does not complete within Timeout seconds will be aborted. By default, AbsoluteTimeout is False, and the timeout is an inactivity timeout.
Note: This option is not valid for User Datagram Protocol (UDP) ports.
When the firewall is a tunneling proxy, use this property to send custom (additional) headers to the firewall (e.g., headers for custom authentication schemes). Used to send extra data to the firewall.
When the firewall is a tunneling proxy, use this property to send custom (additional) headers to the firewall (e.g., headers for custom authentication schemes).
When the firewall is a tunneling proxy, use this property to send custom (additional) headers to the firewall (e.g., headers for custom authentication schemes). Used to send extra data to the firewall.
When the firewall is a tunneling proxy, use this property to send custom (additional) headers to the firewall (e.g., headers for custom authentication schemes).
This is the size of an internal queue in the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be receiving. In some cases, increasing the value of the InBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the InBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
The size in bytes of the incoming queue of the socket.This is the size of an internal queue in the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be receiving. In some cases, increasing the value of the InBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the InBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
This is the size of an internal queue in the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be receiving. In some cases, increasing the value of the InBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the InBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
The size in bytes of the incoming queue of the socket.This is the size of an internal queue in the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be receiving. In some cases, increasing the value of the InBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the InBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be sending. In some cases, increasing the value of the OutBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the OutBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
The size in bytes of the outgoing queue of the socket.This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be sending. In some cases, increasing the value of the OutBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the OutBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be sending. In some cases, increasing the value of the OutBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the OutBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
The size in bytes of the outgoing queue of the socket.This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be sending. In some cases, increasing the value of the OutBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the OutBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
Base Config Settings
When queried, this setting will return a string containing information about the product's build.
The default code page is Unicode UTF-8 (65001).
The following is a list of valid code page identifiers:
Identifier | Name |
037 | IBM EBCDIC - U.S./Canada |
437 | OEM - United States |
500 | IBM EBCDIC - International |
708 | Arabic - ASMO 708 |
709 | Arabic - ASMO 449+, BCON V4 |
710 | Arabic - Transparent Arabic |
720 | Arabic - Transparent ASMO |
737 | OEM - Greek (formerly 437G) |
775 | OEM - Baltic |
850 | OEM - Multilingual Latin I |
852 | OEM - Latin II |
855 | OEM - Cyrillic (primarily Russian) |
857 | OEM - Turkish |
858 | OEM - Multilingual Latin I + Euro symbol |
860 | OEM - Portuguese |
861 | OEM - Icelandic |
862 | OEM - Hebrew |
863 | OEM - Canadian-French |
864 | OEM - Arabic |
865 | OEM - Nordic |
866 | OEM - Russian |
869 | OEM - Modern Greek |
870 | IBM EBCDIC - Multilingual/ROECE (Latin-2) |
874 | ANSI/OEM - Thai (same as 28605, ISO 8859-15) |
875 | IBM EBCDIC - Modern Greek |
932 | ANSI/OEM - Japanese, Shift-JIS |
936 | ANSI/OEM - Simplified Chinese (PRC, Singapore) |
949 | ANSI/OEM - Korean (Unified Hangul Code) |
950 | ANSI/OEM - Traditional Chinese (Taiwan; Hong Kong SAR, PRC) |
1026 | IBM EBCDIC - Turkish (Latin-5) |
1047 | IBM EBCDIC - Latin 1/Open System |
1140 | IBM EBCDIC - U.S./Canada (037 + Euro symbol) |
1141 | IBM EBCDIC - Germany (20273 + Euro symbol) |
1142 | IBM EBCDIC - Denmark/Norway (20277 + Euro symbol) |
1143 | IBM EBCDIC - Finland/Sweden (20278 + Euro symbol) |
1144 | IBM EBCDIC - Italy (20280 + Euro symbol) |
1145 | IBM EBCDIC - Latin America/Spain (20284 + Euro symbol) |
1146 | IBM EBCDIC - United Kingdom (20285 + Euro symbol) |
1147 | IBM EBCDIC - France (20297 + Euro symbol) |
1148 | IBM EBCDIC - International (500 + Euro symbol) |
1149 | IBM EBCDIC - Icelandic (20871 + Euro symbol) |
1200 | Unicode UCS-2 Little-Endian (BMP of ISO 10646) |
1201 | Unicode UCS-2 Big-Endian |
1250 | ANSI - Central European |
1251 | ANSI - Cyrillic |
1252 | ANSI - Latin I |
1253 | ANSI - Greek |
1254 | ANSI - Turkish |
1255 | ANSI - Hebrew |
1256 | ANSI - Arabic |
1257 | ANSI - Baltic |
1258 | ANSI/OEM - Vietnamese |
1361 | Korean (Johab) |
10000 | MAC - Roman |
10001 | MAC - Japanese |
10002 | MAC - Traditional Chinese (Big5) |
10003 | MAC - Korean |
10004 | MAC - Arabic |
10005 | MAC - Hebrew |
10006 | MAC - Greek I |
10007 | MAC - Cyrillic |
10008 | MAC - Simplified Chinese (GB 2312) |
10010 | MAC - Romania |
10017 | MAC - Ukraine |
10021 | MAC - Thai |
10029 | MAC - Latin II |
10079 | MAC - Icelandic |
10081 | MAC - Turkish |
10082 | MAC - Croatia |
12000 | Unicode UCS-4 Little-Endian |
12001 | Unicode UCS-4 Big-Endian |
20000 | CNS - Taiwan |
20001 | TCA - Taiwan |
20002 | Eten - Taiwan |
20003 | IBM5550 - Taiwan |
20004 | TeleText - Taiwan |
20005 | Wang - Taiwan |
20105 | IA5 IRV International Alphabet No. 5 (7-bit) |
20106 | IA5 German (7-bit) |
20107 | IA5 Swedish (7-bit) |
20108 | IA5 Norwegian (7-bit) |
20127 | US-ASCII (7-bit) |
20261 | T.61 |
20269 | ISO 6937 Non-Spacing Accent |
20273 | IBM EBCDIC - Germany |
20277 | IBM EBCDIC - Denmark/Norway |
20278 | IBM EBCDIC - Finland/Sweden |
20280 | IBM EBCDIC - Italy |
20284 | IBM EBCDIC - Latin America/Spain |
20285 | IBM EBCDIC - United Kingdom |
20290 | IBM EBCDIC - Japanese Katakana Extended |
20297 | IBM EBCDIC - France |
20420 | IBM EBCDIC - Arabic |
20423 | IBM EBCDIC - Greek |
20424 | IBM EBCDIC - Hebrew |
20833 | IBM EBCDIC - Korean Extended |
20838 | IBM EBCDIC - Thai |
20866 | Russian - KOI8-R |
20871 | IBM EBCDIC - Icelandic |
20880 | IBM EBCDIC - Cyrillic (Russian) |
20905 | IBM EBCDIC - Turkish |
20924 | IBM EBCDIC - Latin-1/Open System (1047 + Euro symbol) |
20932 | JIS X 0208-1990 & 0121-1990 |
20936 | Simplified Chinese (GB2312) |
21025 | IBM EBCDIC - Cyrillic (Serbian, Bulgarian) |
21027 | Extended Alpha Lowercase |
21866 | Ukrainian (KOI8-U) |
28591 | ISO 8859-1 Latin I |
28592 | ISO 8859-2 Central Europe |
28593 | ISO 8859-3 Latin 3 |
28594 | ISO 8859-4 Baltic |
28595 | ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic |
28596 | ISO 8859-6 Arabic |
28597 | ISO 8859-7 Greek |
28598 | ISO 8859-8 Hebrew |
28599 | ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 |
28605 | ISO 8859-15 Latin 9 |
29001 | Europa 3 |
38598 | ISO 8859-8 Hebrew |
50220 | ISO 2022 Japanese with no halfwidth Katakana |
50221 | ISO 2022 Japanese with halfwidth Katakana |
50222 | ISO 2022 Japanese JIS X 0201-1989 |
50225 | ISO 2022 Korean |
50227 | ISO 2022 Simplified Chinese |
50229 | ISO 2022 Traditional Chinese |
50930 | Japanese (Katakana) Extended |
50931 | US/Canada and Japanese |
50933 | Korean Extended and Korean |
50935 | Simplified Chinese Extended and Simplified Chinese |
50936 | Simplified Chinese |
50937 | US/Canada and Traditional Chinese |
50939 | Japanese (Latin) Extended and Japanese |
51932 | EUC - Japanese |
51936 | EUC - Simplified Chinese |
51949 | EUC - Korean |
51950 | EUC - Traditional Chinese |
52936 | HZ-GB2312 Simplified Chinese |
54936 | Windows XP: GB18030 Simplified Chinese (4 Byte) |
57002 | ISCII Devanagari |
57003 | ISCII Bengali |
57004 | ISCII Tamil |
57005 | ISCII Telugu |
57006 | ISCII Assamese |
57007 | ISCII Oriya |
57008 | ISCII Kannada |
57009 | ISCII Malayalam |
57010 | ISCII Gujarati |
57011 | ISCII Punjabi |
65000 | Unicode UTF-7 |
65001 | Unicode UTF-8 |
Identifier | Name |
1 | ASCII |
2 | NEXTSTEP |
3 | JapaneseEUC |
4 | UTF8 |
5 | ISOLatin1 |
6 | Symbol |
7 | NonLossyASCII |
8 | ShiftJIS |
9 | ISOLatin2 |
10 | Unicode |
11 | WindowsCP1251 |
12 | WindowsCP1252 |
13 | WindowsCP1253 |
14 | WindowsCP1254 |
15 | WindowsCP1250 |
21 | ISO2022JP |
30 | MacOSRoman |
10 | UTF16String |
0x90000100 | UTF16BigEndian |
0x94000100 | UTF16LittleEndian |
0x8c000100 | UTF32String |
0x98000100 | UTF32BigEndian |
0x9c000100 | UTF32LittleEndian |
65536 | Proprietary |
When queried, this setting will return a string containing information about the license this instance of a class is using. It will return the following information:
- Product: The product the license is for.
- Product Key: The key the license was generated from.
- License Source: Where the license was found (e.g., RuntimeLicense, License File).
- License Type: The type of license installed (e.g., Royalty Free, Single Server).
- Last Valid Build: The last valid build number for which the license will work.
In certain circumstances it may be beneficial to mask sensitive data, like passwords, in log messages. Set this to true to mask sensitive data. The default is true.
This setting only works on these classes: AS3Receiver, AS3Sender, Atom, Client(3DS), FTP, FTPServer, IMAP, OFTPClient, SSHClient, SCP, Server(3DS), Sexec, SFTP, SFTPServer, SSHServer, TCPClient, TCPServer.
If set to False, the class will not fire internal idle events. Set this to False to use the class in a background thread on Mac OS. By default, this setting is True.
If there are no events to process when DoEvents is called, the class will wait for the amount of time specified here before returning. The default value is 20.
When set to false, the class will use the system security libraries by default to perform cryptographic functions where applicable.
Setting this configuration setting to true tells the class to use the internal implementation instead of using the system security libraries.
On Windows, this setting is set to false by default. On Linux/macOS, this setting is set to true by default.
To use the system security libraries for Linux, OpenSSL support must be enabled. For more information on how to enable OpenSSL, please refer to the OpenSSL Notes section.
Trappable Errors (FDMSRcRetail Class)
Error Handling (C++)
Call the GetLastErrorCode() method to obtain the last called method's result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. Known error codes are listed below. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message.
FDMSRcRetail Errors
432 | Invalid index. |
501 | Invalid length for this property. |
502 | Invalid data format for this property. |
503 | Value is out of range. |
504 | Credit card digit check failed. |
505 | Card date invalid. |
506 | Card expired. |
519 | Corrupt response. |
520 | Response payload empty. |
521 | Response truncated. |
526 | Invalid timeout value. |
593 | A property required for this transaction is missing. |
529 | Error in XML response. |
530 | Status code received in response indicates an error condition. |
531 | Return code received in response indicates an error condition. |
532 | Cannot generate detail aggregate - this transaction was not successfully authorized. |
533 | Internal error constructing payload. |
The class may also return one of the following error codes, which are inherited from other classes.
HTTP Errors
118 | Firewall error. The error description contains the detailed message. |
143 | Busy executing current method. |
151 | HTTP protocol error. The error message has the server response. |
152 | No server specified in URL. |
153 | Specified URLScheme is invalid. |
155 | Range operation is not supported by server. |
156 | Invalid cookie index (out of range). |
301 | Interrupted. |
302 | Cannot open AttachedFile. |
The class may also return one of the following error codes, which are inherited from other classes.
TCPClient Errors
100 | You cannot change the RemotePort at this time. A connection is in progress. |
101 | You cannot change the RemoteHost (Server) at this time. A connection is in progress. |
102 | The RemoteHost address is invalid (0.0.0.0). |
104 | Already connected. If you want to reconnect, close the current connection first. |
106 | You cannot change the LocalPort at this time. A connection is in progress. |
107 | You cannot change the LocalHost at this time. A connection is in progress. |
112 | You cannot change MaxLineLength at this time. A connection is in progress. |
116 | RemotePort cannot be zero. Please specify a valid service port number. |
117 | You cannot change the UseConnection option while the class is active. |
135 | Operation would block. |
201 | Timeout. |
211 | Action impossible in control's present state. |
212 | Action impossible while not connected. |
213 | Action impossible while listening. |
301 | Timeout. |
302 | Could not open file. |
434 | Unable to convert string to selected CodePage. |
1105 | Already connecting. If you want to reconnect, close the current connection first. |
1117 | You need to connect first. |
1119 | You cannot change the LocalHost at this time. A connection is in progress. |
1120 | Connection dropped by remote host. |
SSL Errors
270 | Cannot load specified security library. |
271 | Cannot open certificate store. |
272 | Cannot find specified certificate. |
273 | Cannot acquire security credentials. |
274 | Cannot find certificate chain. |
275 | Cannot verify certificate chain. |
276 | Error during handshake. |
280 | Error verifying certificate. |
281 | Could not find client certificate. |
282 | Could not find server certificate. |
283 | Error encrypting data. |
284 | Error decrypting data. |
TCP/IP Errors
10004 | [10004] Interrupted system call. |
10009 | [10009] Bad file number. |
10013 | [10013] Access denied. |
10014 | [10014] Bad address. |
10022 | [10022] Invalid argument. |
10024 | [10024] Too many open files. |
10035 | [10035] Operation would block. |
10036 | [10036] Operation now in progress. |
10037 | [10037] Operation already in progress. |
10038 | [10038] Socket operation on nonsocket. |
10039 | [10039] Destination address required. |
10040 | [10040] Message is too long. |
10041 | [10041] Protocol wrong type for socket. |
10042 | [10042] Bad protocol option. |
10043 | [10043] Protocol is not supported. |
10044 | [10044] Socket type is not supported. |
10045 | [10045] Operation is not supported on socket. |
10046 | [10046] Protocol family is not supported. |
10047 | [10047] Address family is not supported by protocol family. |
10048 | [10048] Address already in use. |
10049 | [10049] Cannot assign requested address. |
10050 | [10050] Network is down. |
10051 | [10051] Network is unreachable. |
10052 | [10052] Net dropped connection or reset. |
10053 | [10053] Software caused connection abort. |
10054 | [10054] Connection reset by peer. |
10055 | [10055] No buffer space available. |
10056 | [10056] Socket is already connected. |
10057 | [10057] Socket is not connected. |
10058 | [10058] Cannot send after socket shutdown. |
10059 | [10059] Too many references, cannot splice. |
10060 | [10060] Connection timed out. |
10061 | [10061] Connection refused. |
10062 | [10062] Too many levels of symbolic links. |
10063 | [10063] File name is too long. |
10064 | [10064] Host is down. |
10065 | [10065] No route to host. |
10066 | [10066] Directory is not empty |
10067 | [10067] Too many processes. |
10068 | [10068] Too many users. |
10069 | [10069] Disc Quota Exceeded. |
10070 | [10070] Stale NFS file handle. |
10071 | [10071] Too many levels of remote in path. |
10091 | [10091] Network subsystem is unavailable. |
10092 | [10092] WINSOCK DLL Version out of range. |
10093 | [10093] Winsock is not loaded yet. |
11001 | [11001] Host not found. |
11002 | [11002] Nonauthoritative 'Host not found' (try again or check DNS setup). |
11003 | [11003] Nonrecoverable errors: FORMERR, REFUSED, NOTIMP. |
11004 | [11004] Valid name, no data record (check DNS setup). |